XT

508
Installation Manual
V2.1

Ref. 10048017 AA February 6, 2020

 My Sercel > 2

My Sercel
For a complete library of Technical Documentation please visit the My Sercel
customer Extranet.
My Sercel provides the latest:
• User Manuals
• Software Updates
• Engineering Updates
• Maintenance Procedures
• E-mail notifications for the latest technical updates.

Figure 2-1 My Sercel Homepage

Click here to request a My Sercel account. http://customer.sercel.com or use the

following QR code

2
To contact Sercel
Europe North America
Nantes, France Houston, Texas, USA
Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing & Repair
B.P. 30439, 16 rue de Bel Air Tel: +1 281 492 6688, Fax: +1 281 579 7505
44474 Carquefou Cedex Hot-Line: +1 281 492 6688
Tel: +33 2 40 30 11 81, Fax: +33 2 40 30 19 48 E-mail: [email protected]
Hot-Line: Land: +33 2 40 30 58 88 [email protected]
Marine: +33 2 40 30 59 59 [email protected]
Navigation: +33 2 40 30 69 87 [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected] Tulsa, Oklahoma, USA
[email protected] Tel: +1 918 834 9600, Fax: +1 918 838 8846
[email protected] E-mail: [email protected]
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] Middle East
www.sercel.com
Dubai, U. A. E.
St Gaudens, France Sales; Customer Support; Repair
Vibrator & VSP Customer Support; Tel: +971 4 8832142, Fax: +971 4 8832143
Vibrator Manufacturing & Repair Hot Line: +971 50 6451752
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair E-mail: [email protected]
Tel: +33 5 61 89 90 00, Fax: +33 5 61 89 90 33 [email protected]
Hot Line: (Vib) +33 5 61 89 90 91
(VSP) +33 5 61 89 91 00
Far East
E-mail: [email protected]
[email protected] Beijing, P. R. of China
Research & Development
Brest, France Tel: +86 106 43 76 710,
Sales; Customer Support E-mail: [email protected]
Tel: +33 2 98 05 29 05; Fax: +33 2 98 05 52 41 [email protected]
E-mail: [email protected]
Xushui, P. R. of China
Toulouse, France Manufacturing & Repair
Sales; Customer Support Tel: +86 312 8648355, Fax: +86 312 8648441
Tel: +33 5 61 34 80 74; Fax: +33 5 61 34 80 66 Singapore
E-mail: [email protected] Streamer Manufacturing; Repair; Customer Support
[email protected] Tel: +65 6 417 7000, Fax: +65 6 545 1418
[email protected]

Russia
Moscow, Russia
Customer Support
Tel: +7 495 644 08 05, Fax: +7 495 644 08 04
E-mail: [email protected]
[email protected]
Surgut, Russia
Customer Support; Repair
Tel: +7 3462 28 92 50
 Regulatory Information >

Regulatory Information
European Union Statement
508 products meet the essential requirements of Directives RED 2014/53/UE (Radio), 2014/
30/UE (EMC), 2014/35/UE (Low Voltage) and 2011/65/UE (ROHS).
WARNING

The 508 products are class-A devices. In residential areas, the user may be requested to take
appropriate measures in the event of RF interference caused by these devices.

FCC US Statement
SERCEL products comply with U.S. FCC according to FCC CFR47 Part 15.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
Note Sercel products has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This system generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this system in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

IC Canadian Statement
SERCEL products comply with Industry Canada EMI Class A requirements according to
ICES-003 and RSS Gen.
Les produits SERCEL sont conformes aux exigences Classe A de l’Industrie Canada selon
les normes NMB-003 et CNR Gen.
Note These devices comply with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause interference; and 
(2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

4
Regulatory Information > 4

China Regulation
508 Products comply with China ROHS 2.

5 February 6, 2020
 License Agreement > 5

License Agreement
By downloading, installing, copying or otherwise using the present software and its
associated parts or items (« Software »), you, as licensee (“Licensee”) agree without
signature to the terms and conditions of the present software license agreement
(“Agreement”) issued by us (“Licensor) governed and judged by the French Laws and
French Courts in case of dispute resulting from its enforcement.

License.
The Software is copyrighted and licensed but not sold.
The license (“License”) is a non-exclusive, non-transferable, revocable license (with no right
to sub-licence) to use the object code version of the Software solely for the Licensee’s own
internal use for an indefinite period of time or during the term indicated by the Licensor, if
any.
The Licence allows copy for back up purposes only and does not authorise the Licensee or
anyone else to:
(a) Copy, reproduce, translate, adapt, vary, enhance or modify, merge, reverse engineer,
reverse assemble, decompile, or disassemble the Software or use the Software parts or items
separately;
(b) Remove from the Software any labels or notices (including copyright notices) as to the
Licensor’s ownership of the Software or any other intellectual property rights;
(c) Distribute, publish, transfer, licence, sublicense, sell, rent, lease, lend or make directly or
indirectly the Software or program documentation in whole or in part (including but not
limited to object code, source code and source program listings) available to other
organisations, entities or persons;
(d) Use or exploit the Software commercially or for the benefit of others;
(e) Create or attempt to create derivative works from the Software;
(f) Use the Software to violate the terms and conditions of any other software licensing
agreement between the Licensee and any third parties.
If Licensee is located in a country which requires a specific export licence or registration of
software licenses with government authorities, Licensee shall be responsible at its own cost
for meeting all requirement of such registration.

Import and Export.

Licensee is solely responsible for obtaining the necessary import licenses and any other
official authorizations and to carry out all customs formalities necessary and for paying all
associated costs, taxes and duties.

6
License Agreement >

Licensee acknowledges that Software and any related services and technology, including
technical information supplied by Licensor or contained in the Software or associated
documents (collectively “Items”), is or may be subject to export controls of any government
or community including but not limited to the U.S. government or E.U. Community (
collectively “Controls”). The export controls may ban or restrict or require licenses for the
export or re-export of Items from the United States or E.U. or any other countries. As a
consequence any delivery schedule and performance of any of Licensor’s obligation are
subject to the enforcement of any Controls and the obtaining of any licence if any, and
Licensor shall not be liable to Licensee for any damage and loss resulting thereof. The Parties
agree to provide each other with any reasonable assistance, in particular for the issue of any
document that may be required by relevant administration, to comply with the obligations of
this Agreement and the Controls and for this purpose the Licensee will complete the end user
statement submitted by the Licensor.
Warranty.
Licensor warrants that Software was developed with reasonable diligence and skill and that
it substantially conforms to published documentation.
Except as expressly provided above, Software is deemed to be accepted "AS IS", without any
further warranty of any kind, express or implied. The Licensor excludes, without limitation,
the warranties of merchantability, of fitness for a particular purpose and of non-
infringement. The Licensor does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or
completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained with the
Software.

Liability.
In no event shall the Licensor be liable for any claim or any damages including, without
limitation, direct, indirect, compensatory, special, incidental, punitive, exemplary or
consequential whether bodily, material or immaterial (such as, but not limited to loss of
profit or anticipated profits or revenues, loss of sales or data, contract, production, or
bargains, interruption of business, damage to goodwill or loss due to any delay) howsoever
caused including without limitation use or inability to use of the Software, breach of contract
(negligence included), breach of warranty, breach of duty (statutory duty included), tort or
otherwise even when Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

Confidentiality.
Licensee acknowledges and agrees that this Licence Agreement, any financial, business,
technical information, trade secret and Know How proprietary to the Licensor and contained
in the Software and/or in the documentation shall be deemed to be “Confidential
Information” and as such shall not be disclosed directly or indirectly by the Licensee to any
third party. Any breach of this provision by Licensee would cause Licensor to suffer
immediate and irreparable harm. In the event of such breach, Licensor shall have, in addition

7 February 6, 2020
 License Agreement > 5

to any and all remedies at law, the right to an injunction, specific performance or other
equitable relief. Licensee’s obligation of confidentiality under this provision shall survive
expiry or termination of this Licence Agreement.

Intellectual property rights, patents and copyrights to Software.

Licensee acknowledges and agrees that all intellectual property rights and all Confidential
Information (whether existing or future) in and to the Software and in and to the associated
documentation belong or are licensed to Licensor and that Licensee only rights pertaining to
said intellectual property rights are these defined in this Licence Agreement. No title or
ownership of Software is transferred under this Agreement. Licensee shall take no action that
might impair any right, title or interest of Licensor as owner or as licensee in or to the
Software. Licensee shall not have any rights in or to any trademark or trade name owned by
Licensor with respect to the Software. Any breach of the provision here above of the present
provision by Licensee would cause Licensor to suffer immediate and irreparable harm. In the
event of such breach, Licensor shall have, in addition to any and all remedies at law, the right
to an injunction, specific performance or other equitable relief.

Termination.
The Licensor has the right to terminate this Agreement and Licensee's right to use this
Software upon any material breach by Licensee. The Licensee agrees to return to Licensor
or to destroy all copies of the Software upon termination of the License.

8
5
License Agreement >

(Page intentionally blank)

 Revision history > 6

Revision history
Chapters or
Date of Manual Description of revision or reason
pages
revision Version for change
affected

Dec. 2019 AA Release Version 2.1

10
> 7

My Sercel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1 Introduction
Introducing the 508XT system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
508XT Ground Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
508XT Central Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
508XT System Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
508XT System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
508XT Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2 Hardware
Network Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
AC Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SMX-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Server computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Client Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Laptop Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tablet Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5508XT Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
LCD display anchoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

3 Server-508 Software
Standard Server-508 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Standalone Mode Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11 February 6, 2020
 >

Server-508 Patch Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Server-508 Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

4 Client-508 Software
Standard Client-508 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Standalone Mode Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Client-508 Patch Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

5 Server-DCM Software
Standard Server-DCM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Standalone Mode Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Co-hosted Mode Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
DCM Patch Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Un-installing Server-DCM application software . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Customize Server-428 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

6 Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Co-hosted mode installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
DCM Patch Installer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Un-installing Client-DCM applications suite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7 Peripherals
LCD Screen Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
NAS Storage Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tablet Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Handheld Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

12
> 7

8 Data Harvester WTU-508

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Creating a bootable Ubuntu 14.04 LTS flash key . . . . . . . . . . 271
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet. . . . . . . . 272
Installing the DCM Reaper application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Installing DCM Field Monitor Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Software Access Point Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

9 PFT Software
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Exiting the PFT application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Connecting the Workabout Pro 4 to a Windows PC . . . . . . . . 285
Reinstalling the Workabout Pro 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Workabout Pro 4 device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Installing DCM PFT software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Transferring Field Units list by USB Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Configuring the PFT application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Communication of PFT with Server-DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

10 Field Equipment Deployment

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
508XT Spread Layout Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Handling and service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
WTU-508 Field Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Access Point Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
LRC-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

13 February 6, 2020
 >

11 Data Harvester CX-508

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

12 Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Ethernet Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
SL-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
DT-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
IT-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

13 Field Tester FT-508

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
FT-508 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

14 508XT for Transition Zone

Specific Handling Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
TZ Pack CX-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
LINK-508XT-TZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
TZ TFOI-508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
TZ LRC-508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
TZ Energy Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

15 Field Equipment Specifications

Land & Marsh Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

16 Index

14
Chapter

1 Introduction

In this chapter:

• Introducing the 508XT system (page 16)

• System Architecture (page 16)
• 508XT Ground Equipment (page 20)
• 508XT Central Unit (page 33)
• 508XT System Documentation (page 35)
• 508XT System Software (page 35)
• 508XT Peripheral Equipment (page 37)

508XT Installation Manual 15

 Introduction
Introducing the 508XT system > 1

Introducing the 508XT system

508XT is Sercel’s cross-technology (X-Tech) powered land seismic acquisition system,
driving productivity, data quality and adaptability to a new level.
508XT offers 1 million channel real-time recording capability, resulting in unparalleled
image resolution.
The 508XT platform also introduces QuietSeis®, a new, high-performance digital sensor
based on next generation MEMS, allowing seismic signals to be recorded with instrument
noise levels three times lower than before.
508XT allows access to data with zero downtime and in real time thanks to its new generation
of intelligent networking technology. All its data handling elements communicate with each
other to transmit data seamlessly, at high speeds and without interruption while specific
features for local data storage, automatic re-routing, and new levels of redundancy and
quality control ensure non-stop production. With the introduction of the Wireless
Transmission Unit, WTU-508, the operation flexibility of the 508XT is now further
enhanced. The addition of the single channel autonomous node extends the cross-technology
architecture to include wireless node acquisition on one platform.

System Architecture
The graphic (Figure 1-1) shows an overall context diagram of the 508XT architecture. The
following sections describe the main configuration options of the system.

16
Figure 1-1 508XT Architecture Overview
 Introduction
System Architecture > Wireless Operation - Controlled Source 1

Wireless Operation - Controlled Source

For fully wireless operation, the 508XT system is configured as shown in the following
graphic. In this configuration, the Server-508 controls the sources and generates template
SEG-D files containing only source information, which are passed to the Data Completion
Manager (DCM).
In the DCM, the seismic data received from WTUs is merged with the template SEG-D files
(from 508XT), and the completed SEG-D files for export are generated.

Figure 1-2 508XT Wireless operation

Note Two installation options are possible, see Chapter 5 for details.
• the co-hosted server option where the Server-508 software and DCM software are
installed on the same physical server,
• the standalone server option where the Server-508 software and DCM software are
installed on separate server machines, which are networked together.

18
Introduction
System Architecture > Wireless Operation - Autonomous Source

Wireless Operation - Autonomous Source

From the source file, the template SEG-D files are generated, and the seismic data from the
WTUs is then merged with the source file to generate the completed SEG-D files for export.
A further configuration option for fully wireless operation is shown in the following graphic.
This configuration is used where autonomous sources are in operation. That is, the source
electronics record the source events locally, and upload a file containing these events to the
Data Completion Manager.
From the source file, the template SEG-D files are generated, and the seismic data from the
WTUs is then merged with the source file to generate the completed SEG-D files for export.

Figure 1-3 Wireless operation - Autonomous sources

19 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > Wireless Operation - Autonomous Source 1

508XT Ground Equipment

Figure 1-4 Basic Layout Principle 508XT

20
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > FDU-508

FDU-508

Figure 1-5 FDU-508

The FDU-508 analog node is a combination of FDU (field digitizer unit) and lightweight
cable. The FDU-508 performs data filtering, compression and time stamping. The length and
type of cable as well as the number of FDUs and their intervals are user-defined. The sensors
connect directly into the FDU eliminating any significant analogue path within the recording
system.
Once data has been processed the FDU-508 transmits data to the CX-508 with CRC control.

FDU-508 functions
• 24 bit A/D conversion of the signal
• Filtering, compression and time stamping of the data
• Transmission of the data samples to the CX-508 with CRC control
• Local data storage and re-transmission if needed
• Instrument and sensor tests
• Selectable low cut filter down to 0.15Hz

FDU-508 includes
• Circular buffer memory
• RFID chip for inventory management

21 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > DSU1-508 1

DSU1-508
The Digital Synthesizer Unit (DSU1-508) is an integrated package including station
electronics and a single digital accelerometer based on QuietSeis® MEMS (Micro-machined
Electro-Mechanical Sensor) technology.
It offers the same link concept as the standard FDU-508 link, plus a fully integrated digital
accelerometer.

Figure 1-6 DSU1-508

DSU1-508 links can be used jointly with analog-sensor units (FDU-508) within the same
spread under the control of a single CX-508 concentrator unit. See Field Equipment
Deployment (page 307) for details.
The DSU1-508 comes with a high-tech spike that most of the time makes it possible to plant
it without drilling and provides better coupling, therefore allowing quicker deployment and
higher data quality.

DSU1-508 Functions
• Acceleration measurement
• Filtering, compression and time stamping of the data
• Transmission of the data samples to the CX-508 with CRC control
• Local data storage and re-transmission if needed.
• Instrument and sensor tests
• Selectable low cut filter down to 0.15Hz

DSU1-508 Includes
• QuietSeis® accelerometer single sensor board
• Circular buffer memory

22
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > CX-508 Concentrator

• RFID chip for inventory management

• Optimized electronic design: power consumption halved (in comparison to previous
Sercel acquisition systems).

CX-508 Concentrator
At the center of the 508XT system is the CX-508 concentrator.

Figure 1-7 CX-508 Concentrator

The CX-508 performs the main line management functions for the 508XT system. This
includes power management of the line on both sides, data recovery from FDU-508/DSU1-
508 as well as field & instrument test management. In addition the CX-508 provides QC
status for battery level, the GPS status and detection of connected nodes.
A secondary transverse hot connection is also possible for additional redundancy.

CX-508 Functions
• GPS for line synchronization
• Circular memory for data storage
• RFID chip for inventory management
• 6 LEDs for fast status check
• 2 power plugs for battery hot swap (12V batteries)
• 1 port for connection to antenna or harvesting tool
• 2 FM4 ports for the line
• 2 transverse ports for TFOI-508 (page 24) connection

23 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > TFOI-508 1

TFOI-508
Handling data of 1Gbps., the maximum length of the TFOI-508 is 2000m.
For additional redundancy, secondary transverse hot connection is possible.

Fibre optics
cable (up to
2 km)

Figure 1-8 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable

WTU-508
The Wireless Transmission Unit (WTU) is a self-contained, wireless, seismic data recording
unit, which performs data filtering, compression, time stamping, and storage of data. The
sensors connect directly into the WTU eliminating any significant analogue path, improving
recording fidelity.

Figure 1-9 WTU-508

24
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > WTU-508

The stored data may either be transmitted to the Data Completion Manager (DCM) by
wireless connection via a APU, or may be harvested from the WTU by a Data Harvester
which would then be transported to the DCM for offloading of the data.

WTU-508 Functions
24 bit A/D conversion of the signal, which is then filtered, compressed
Recording
and timestamped before storage in local, non-volatile memory.
Timing for timestamping of the data is generated from the WTUs inte-
Timing grated GPS receiver.
The integrated GPS receiver allows the WTU to record its GPS position,
Positioning which is used in the DCM Position environment to register the units
stake ID.
Data is stored in non-volatile flash memory, with sufficient autonomy to
Memory record for 30 days continuously (2ms sample interval).
The internal battery provides the WTU with 750 hours of autonomy (30
Autonomy days at 24hrs/day).
An external battery can be used to extend the autonomy.
Both instrument and sensor tests are performed and the results stored
Built-in-tests
for harvesting.
The WTUs communicate to form a self-organising network with each
other through which their State-of-Health data (e.g. battery state, field
noise state, sensor status etc.) is transferred to a status terminal. This
State of Health
network is known as Pathfinder.
Pathfinder also allows the WTUs to communicate their GPS position to
the DCM, thus enabling allocation of the stake-ID using Position.
In addition to the Pathfinder network, a wireless LAN transceiver is inte-
Communications grated in the WTU to allow rapid harvesting of seismic data by a Data
Harvester or direct to the DCM via a APU.

25 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > WTU-508 1

Charger Offloader WTU-508

The WTU-508 internal battery can be charged via a dedicated battery charger, the Charger
Offloader WTU-508.

Figure 1-10 Charger Offloader WTU-508

The Charger Offloader WTU-508 can also be used to download data to the DCM,
simultaneously as it charges the units.
The data downloading time depends on the quantity recorded but will be minimal compared
to the battery charging time. A full memory (30 days / 24h of data @ 2ms) will not take more
than 15 minutes to be retrieved.
For more details see Charger Offloader WTU-508 Specifications (page 520).

26
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > Data Harvester WTU-508

Data Harvester WTU-508

The Data Harvester WTU-508 is used to collect seismic data and QC data from WTUs
deployed in the field, and to transport this data to the Central Unit where it can be uploaded
to the system server.

Figure 1-11 Data Harvester WTU-508

The Data Harvester primarily uses wireless LAN to communicate with the WTUs, but can
also connect using a cable.
The hardware of the Data Harvester is a rugged tablet PC with internal wireless card and
either internal or external antenna. The functionality is delivered by a 508XT software
package called Reaper, a summary of this functionality is listed below.
• Uploads harvested seismic data to DCM, part of the 508XT System
• Downloads Timebreak list from 508XT System
• Can import Timebreak list in the form of a file
• Uploads harvested QC data to 508XT System
• Can export QC data to file (for 508XT System import)
• Harvests Seismic data from WTUs
- Display of progress during harvesting
• List view
• Topographic view
• Harvests QC data from WTUs

27 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > Data Harvester CX-508 1

• Display of QC data to Data Harvester Operator

- Summary
- Detailed results for troubleshooting
• Initiation of WTU sensor tests
- Display of results
• Can harvest historical QC data from WTUs

Data Harvester CX-508

The Data Harvester 508 (DH-508) serves to harvest seismic date from autonomous
concentrators.
The DH-508 transmits data to the central unit via:
• Switch: if available on the Ethernet port, using an RJ45 cable
• Transverse Concentrator: connect the DH-508 on the XDP plug of a transverse CX-508
• Line Concentrator: connect the DH-508 on the XDP plug of a line CX-508
DH-508 software runs on a Tetra RT12 tablet.

Figure 1-12 DH-508 on Tetra RT12 or U11i tablet

28
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > PFT-508

PFT-508
The PFT-508 is a hand-held computer, which is primarily used by the field crew to associate
the ID number of each WTU to the stake ID at which it is located. In order to perform this
function, the PFT has an RFID reader which allows it to scan the WTU ID from several
meters distance.

Figure 1-13 PFT-508

Additional functionality offered by the PFT are:

• WTU inventory – a number of WTUs within RFID range can be scanned and their IDs
recorded.

29 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > FT-508 1

FT-508
The FT-508 is a tool dedicated for outdoor work to help troubleshooters, Observers and
Customer Support Engineer to test the Field Units deployed along the 508XT Line. The FT-
508 tool provides information about Field units connected together and indicates if the Field
Unit is functional or not.

Figure 1-14 FT-508 on RT12/TA10 or U11i Tablet

The FT-508 allows you to perform the following operations:

• Layout visualization.
• Numeric table for test results.
• Perform Instrument tests:
• Noise
• Gain
• Phase
• Distortion
• Pulse
• CMRR
• Perform Field tests:
• Noise
• Resistance
• Tilt
• Tilt Model
• Leakage

30
Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > Deploying Tool (DT-508)

• Impulse
• Distortion
The FT-508 is able to export .csv files on USB key with the list of test results.
The 508 Field Tester can be used at base camp to validate repairs on links. The FT-508 can
also be used on the field during line deployment in order to validate the connection of links,
check sensor connections, battery level on the concentrator, as well as testing the
communication between concentrators.

Deploying Tool (DT-508)

The Sercel Deploying Tool 508 (DT-508) application is used to assist in the deployment of
field equipment such as Concentrators (CX-508) and Nodes (FDU-508 and DSU-508) on an
autonomous spread.

Figure 1-15 DT-508 on WAP4PDA

31 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Ground Equipment > APU (Access Point Unit) 1

APU (Access Point Unit)

The Access Point Unit allows field units (WTU) to connect to the wired network via Wi-Fi.
It integrates 2 main functions.
• Wireless Access Point for wireless communications with WTUs
• Ethernet port for wired connection to 508XT central server or Data Harvester
The principle functions that the APU can perform are:
• Wireless Access Point for 508XT for configuring WTU operational parameters
- APU is connected to the 508XT system server by Ethernet and communicates via
wireless to the WTUs
• Wireless Access Point for Data Harvester
- APU is connected to a Data Harvester by Ethernet communicates via wireless to
WTUs

Figure 1-16 APU Antenna

32
Introduction
508XT Central Unit > SCI-508

508XT Central Unit

SCI-508

SCI-508 (Front)

SCI-508 (Rear)

SCI_B-508 (Rear)

Figure 1-17 SCI-508, SCI_B-508

Analogue signals from the source (sweep pilots, Uphole geophone, TB), can be recorded via
the SCI-508.
The SCI-508 also interfaces peripheral equipment such as the source controllers and the
external GPS antenna.
The Low Line port of the SCI-508 connects to (FDU-508) Auxiliary traces. The Blaster 1
and Blaster 2 ports connect to a shooting system.

33 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Central Unit > SCI-508 1

SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 Functions

• System Control Interface
• Connected to the switch
• Rack mounted in the recording cabin
• Manages the network of concentrators
• Records the auxiliary channels
• Manages the ON/OFF of the spread by controlling the TFOI-508
• Only one SCI is required, whatever the spread configuration
• No internal GPS in the SCI-508
• No Bluetooth in the SCI-508
• RFID for inventory management
• SCI_B-508 allows to manage 12 transverse connections (via SMX-508)

34
Introduction
508XT System Documentation > 508XT System Installation Keys

508XT System Documentation

Documentation included with the 508XT system is available on the accompanying USB key
provided with your system (ref. 10040994) or on the My Sercel Extranet. If you do not have
a My Sercel account please click the following link to request access.
My Sercel account request
Documentation for the 508XT system consists of the following manuals:
• Installation Manual: provides an introduction to the 508XT system, installation
information, a few instructions for the operator to get started, and reference information
that will help you select a 508XT configuration tailored to your needs.
• Functional Manual Volume 1: describes the parameters displayed on the 508XT
system’s Graphic User Interface (GUI) and how to use each window.
• Functional Manual Volume 2 (DCM): describes the Data Completion Manager (DCM)
application.
• Data Format Manual: contains information on logged data and on interfaces
(description of Input/Output formats, including the SEGD format).
• Technical Manual: contains maintenance and repair information, including operating
instructions for using the system’s testers.

508XT System Software

508XT System Installation Keys
508XT System Installation software are available on several secure USB keys provided upon
product delivery.
508XT System Installation keys are readable only USB keys.

Main Installation
Key Name Issue Part No.
Software

Server 508 v2.1 Server-508 v2.1 for Linux 01/2018 18/01/2018 10043346
Client-508 v2.1 for Windows

Client 508 v2.1 Client-508 v2.1 for Linux 48/2017 30/11/2017 10038309

FT-508 v2.1 Server/Client FT 508 v2.1 48/2017 30/11/2017 10038443

DH-508 v2.1 Server/Client DH 508 v2.1 48/2017 30/11/2017 10038444

35 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT System Software > DCM (Data Completion Manager) System Installation key 1

Main Installation
Key Name Issue Part No.
Software

DCM v2.1 RHEL Server-DCM v2.1 for Linux 16/2018 19/04/2018 10040199
Client-DCM v2.1 for Linux/
Windows
Field Monitor 2.0.0
DCM Reaper 2.0.0
DCM PFT 2.0.0

Figure 1-18 508XT Installation key example

DCM (Data Completion Manager) System Installation key

DCM system software is delivered in secure USB keys:

Main Installation
Key Name Issue Part No.
Software

DCM v2.1 RHEL Server-DCM v2.1 for Linux 16/2018 19/04/2018 10040199
Client-DCM v2.1 for Linux/
Windows
Field Monitor 2.0.0
dcm Reaper 2.0.0
dcm PFT 2.0.0

The Data Completion Manager software is used for the following operations with the WTU-
508:
• Configuring acquisition parameters
• Configuring operational parameters
• Updating firmware
• Assigning stake-IDs

36
Introduction
508XT Peripheral Equipment > DCM (Data Completion Manager) System Installation key

• Receiving data in real-time via a APU

• Receiving harvested data from a Data Harvester
• Monitoring State-of-Health data from the Pathfinder network
• Receiving harvested QC data from a Data Harvester
In addition, the Data Completion Manager software receives SEG-D files from the 508XT
server and merges data received from the WTUs before generating finalised SEG-D files for
export. If required, the Data Completion Manager can be used to convert SEG-D Rev 3 files
from the 508XT server to any SEG-D revision required.

508XT Peripheral Equipment

The 508XT system can be equipped with the following compatible hardware.
• Synchro Accutime GPS for SCI-508
• Printer
• NAS
• Plotter
• Source Management hardware

GPS Synchronization
The 508XT system uses the Trimble Accutime Gold GPS Smart Antenna as an external GPS.
The GPS is used for time synchronization.

NAS
Large-capacity, removable disks rather than tape drives can be used to record your SEGD
files, allowing zero-dead-time shooting. The Sercel Network Attached Storage system
(NAS) uses the Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) technology, providing the
data redundancy needed for a highly secure system.

Printer
A standard colour printer allows automatic printouts of observer’s reports, or log from any
operation, or snapshots.

Plotter
An external plotter can be attached to the network to generate a paper record of the acquired
seismic data, either in read-after-write or in playback mode.

Source Management
The 508XT is compatible with VE464 Seismic source controller hardware.

37 February 6, 2020
 Introduction
508XT Peripheral Equipment > DCM (Data Completion Manager) System Installation key 1

Auxiliaries Management
The AUX-508 (ref. 10024667) allows you to record Analog signals from the source (sweep
pilots, Uphole geophone, TB). The AUX-508 is a rack-mount unit connected to the SCI-508.

Figure 1-19 AUX-508 (front)

Figure 1-20 AUX-508 (rear)

The AUX-508 houses 4 FDU-508 channels. The auxiliary signals are connected to the AUX-
508 through banana jacks on its rear panel. The AUX LINE IN port connects to the Low Line
port of the SCI-508. The AUX LINE OUT port can be used to connect another AUX-508 or
an FDU-508 link.

38
Chapter

2 Hardware

This chapter provides information for installing hardware in the

recording truck. The client computer and peripherals, however, are
not covered in detail in this chapter.

In this chapter:

• Network Configurations (page 40)

• AC Power requirements (page 45)
• SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 (page 46)
• SMX-508 (page 55)
• Server computer (page 58)
• Client Computer (page 64)
• Handheld Computer (page 72)
• Tablet Computer (page 73)
• 508XT Rack (page 76)
• LCD display anchoring (page 97)

508XT Installation Manual 39

 Hardware
Network Configurations > Standard Network Configurations 2

Network Configurations
Standard Network Configurations

Co-hosted Server-508 and Server-DCM

Figure 2-1 508XT Standard Network Configuration (co-hosted 508XT server & DCM server)

In the above configuration, the 508 and DCM Servers are installed on the same machine.
The 508 and DCM Clients are installed on separate machines.

40
Hardware
Network Configurations > Standard Network Configurations

Co-hosted Server-508 and DCM-508 (no 508 line)

Figure 2-2 Server-508 and Server-DCM508 (co-hosted with no 508XT line)

In the above configuration there is no 508XT line. The Server-508 is only used to manage the
seismic source.
The 508 and DCM Servers are installed on the same machine. The 508 and DCM Clients
are installed on the same machine.

41 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Network Configurations > Standard Network Configurations 2

508XT Network Configuration with Standalone DCM

Figure 2-3 508XT Network Configuration with Standalone DCM

In the above configuration, the 508 and DCM Servers are installed on separate machines.
The 508 and DCM Clients are installed on separate machines.

42
Hardware
Network Configurations > Standard Network Configurations

Local host IP address Used by Network for

SCI-508 172.27.0.1 Server-508 / CX-508

172.27.128.1 Eth0 / eno1 Peripherals

172.27.151.200 Eth1 / eno2 SCI-508 / CX-508

172.30.128.1 Eth2 / eno3 DPG-464

None (if option

Server-508 10 Gb option
Eth3 / eno4 Option for Export on NAS
Server-DCM active)
172.27.127.1

172.27.127.1 Export on NAS (optional 10Gb

Eth4 / ens2f0
additional card)

Export on NAS (optional 10Gb

172.27.126.1 Eth5
additional card)

Client-508 (#1) 172.27.128.2 Eth0 Peripherals

Client-508 (#2) 172.27.128.3 Eth0 Peripherals

Client-DCM 172.27.128.200 Eth0 Peripherals

Plotter 172.27.128.26 Peripherals

DPG-464 172.30.200.150

172.27.128.41
NAS4000, NAS12000H (10 GB
172.27.127.41
NAS1 172.27.126.41
option), NAS TOWER XTB, NAS
RACK XTB
172.27.125.41

APU 10.xx.xx.xx

Data Harvester 10.2.xx.x

Airgun shooting UDP Socket /

172.27.128.11
system port 1471

1. Note: Please refer to NAS Storage Systems on page 214 for more information.

43 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Network Configurations > Identifying Ethernet interface ports 2

Identifying Ethernet interface ports

Whenever you want to make sure all Ethernet ports are properly connected, you can use the
ping command to test whether a computer can reach the expected hosts across the network.
This assumes that the Sercel software is already installed on the computer and on the distant
host.
1. See Network Configurations (page 40) to find the IP address
(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) of the host which should be visible to your computer.
2. If your computer runs on Linux, open a Terminal window. If it runs on Windows,
open a Command Prompt window.
3. Type the command ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Return
(assuming xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the host you want to connect to).
4. If you get a reply saying that a number of packets were sent and received, do not
change anything. Otherwise, move the Ethernet cable to another port, on the distant
host or on your computer, and “ping” the network again. Try again until you get a
correct reply.

44
Hardware
AC Power requirements > Identifying Ethernet interface ports

AC Power requirements

In order to help you determine the total AC power required and circuit breaker amperages,
depending on the configuration of your recording cab, the table below gives the typical
consumption of each device that your 508XT system may include.
508XT 110 VAC 220 VAC × =
SCI-508 2A 1A
SCI_B-508 2A 1A
SMX-508
VE464 DPG 1.6 A 0.8 A
Ethernet switch (typical) 1A 0.5 A

Client-508 HP DL380p-Gen8 12 A 10 A
Server-508 HP Z420 10 A 6A

Client-DCM 10 A 6A
Server-DCM 10 A 6A

LCD display (typical) 1A 0.5 A

NAS system 4A 2A
Tape drive (typical) 3A 1.5 A
Printer
FT-508 1.5 A 1.5 A
DH-508 1.5 A 1.5 A
DH-WTU 1.5 A 1.5 A
PFT 1.5 A 1.5 A
APU 4A 2A
WTU-Charger 6A 3A
Total =

45 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > SCI-508 2

SCI-508 & SCI_B-508

SCI-508
The SCI-508 controls the GPS, the DPG or Shooting System and the auxiliary traces.

Front Panel

Figure 2-4 SCI-508 (Front)

• Rackable
• ON/OFF switch
• Blue LED indicating that GPS Synchronisation is OK

Rear panel

Figure 2-5 SCI-508 (Rear)

• Power Supply 110/220V AC

• 1 Fuse
• 1 Grounding contact

46
Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > SCI_B-508

• 2 blaster ports
• XDP2 port to connect the Synchro Accutime SCI-508
• Ethernet 1Gbps communication link towards the server-508.
• 1 Low line connection
• 2 transverse connections

SCI_B-508
The new generation SCI_B-508 allows you to manage up to 12 transverse connections via
the SMX-508. The improved design also allows a direct connection from the Input Panel via
an RJ45 cable, an adapter is no longer required.

Front Panel

Figure 2-6 SCI_B-508 (front)

• Rackable
• ON/OFF switch
• Blue LED indicating that GPS Synchronisation is OK

47 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > SCI_B-508 2

Rear Panel

Figure 2-7 SCI_B-508 (rear)

• Power Supply 110/220V AC

• 1 Grounding contact
• XDP2 port to connect the Synchro Accutime SCI-508
• RFID for identification
• Ethernet 1Gbps communication link towards the Server-508
• 2 RJ-45 for Transverse 508 connection
• 2 RJ-45 for SMX-508 connection
• 2 blaster ports
• AUX Line Out connection

WARNING
SCI_B-508 or SMX-508 cannot be powered off individually: both units must be
powered off together. Additionally, the SMX-508 must be powered ON, before the
SCI_B-508.

48
Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Input Panel

Input Panel
The 508XT Input Panel allows you to connect the TFOI-508 from the field to the recorder
truck.

XT Input Panel
Figure 2-8 508

The Input Panel connects the 508XT Transverse (TFOI) cable with seismic field data to the
recording truck.

49 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Input Panel 2

Installation and Double Anchoring

Figure 2-9 Double anchoring on Recording Truck

50
Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Input Panel

Installation and Single Cable anchoring

Figure 2-10 Single anchoring on Recording Truck

51 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Connection to DPG 464 2

Connection to DPG 464

Figure 2-11 SCI-508 cabling

52
Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Connection to DPG 464

Figure 2-12 SCI_B-508 cabling to VE464

53 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SCI-508 & SCI_B-508 > Connection to DPG 464 2

Figure 2-13 SCI_B-508 ports with SMX-508 Input

WARNING
When connecting SMX-508 to the SCI_B-508 hardware, please ensure that only the
provided RJ45 (50 cm) cables are used. Any other length of cable should not be used.
Note When connecting the SMX-508 to the SCI_B-508 ensure the cable connected to
TA and TB on the SMX-508 is connected to the corresponding TA and TB
connection on SCI_B-508.

54
 Hardware
SMX-508 > Connection to Land Shooting system

Table 2-1 Switch Ethernet-508 connections

SCI-508 Server-508
SMX-508 Ports
Ports Ports

Ethernet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NET Port
Port

Switch
Ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
508 Ports

Connection to Land Shooting system

To connect a shooting system, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

Figure 2-14 Shooter encoder connected to SCI-508(Blaster 1 or Blaster 2 port)

When radio transmission is an issue in Dynamite operations, you may want the shooter
encoder to be closer to the blasters. Any way you connect the encoder, however, radio
transmission conditions should be good enough to allow the shooter to talk to the observer.

SMX-508
The SMX-508 is an additional hardware equipment extending the recorder output capacity
(from 2 to 12 primary transverses @1 Gb/s).
This product is required for high-channel count requirements (>100.000ch @2ms) or
complex spread deployments (highway crossing for e.g.).

IMPORTANT
The SMX-508 is compatible with the SCI_B-508. Previous versions of SCI-508 are
not compatible with SMX-508.

55 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
SMX-508 > Connection to Land Shooting system 2

Figure 2-15 SMX-508 (Front)

• Rackable
• ON/OFF switch
• Blue LED indicating that connection with SCI_B-508 is OK

Figure 2-16 SMX-508 (Rear)

• Power Supply 110/220V AC

• 1 Grounding contact
• 12 RJ-45 Transverse 508 input connection (2 metre cable)
• 12 RJ-45 Switch output connections (2 metre cable)
• 2 RJ-45 ports to connect the SMX-508 to the SCI_B-508 (50 cm cable)
Ethernet 1Gbps communication link towards the central unit.

56
Hardware
SMX-508 > Dedicated SMX-508 Switch

WARNING
SCI_B-508 or SMX-508 cannot be powered off individually: both units must be
powered off together. Additionally, the SMX-508 must be powered ON, before the
SCI_B-508.

Dedicated SMX-508 Switch

The Hirschmann MACH104 Ethernet switch is a managed switch dedicated for SMX-508
use. It supports up to 24 ports Gigabit Ethernet and must be always used together with SMX-
508 (no other switch is supported by SMX-508).

Figure 2-17 Hirschmann MACH104 Ethernet switch

57 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Server computer > Dedicated SMX-508 Switch 2

Server computer

WARNING
Be sure to install servers in an area where airflow is not obstructed, maintain proper
clearance and provide appropriate air conditioning in the recording cab in order to
meet the environmental requirements specified in the manufacturer’s
documentation.

Available configurations
The following table outlines the different configurations available for the HPDL380 G8 / G9
machine.

Machine Type Number of Hard Drives Configuration

Server-508 Server-DCM

HPDL380 G8/G10 8 X X

8 X
HPDL380 G9/G10 14 X
24 X X

58
Hardware
Server computer > HP Proliant DL380 Gen8 Server

HP Proliant DL380 Gen8 Server

1 2

Figure 2-18 Front View

6 7 8 9 10

Figure 2-19 Rear View

Item Description Item Description

1 DVD Drive 6 Ethernet Gb slots

2 Drive Bays 7 RS232

3 Power Switch 8 VGA Connector

4 USB 2.0 connectors 9 USB 2.0 connectors

5 Reseved slot for additional card 10 Redundant Power supply

59 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Server computer > HP Proliant DL380 Gen8 Server 2

Machine Configuration

Type HP DL 380 Gen8

Microprocessor Intel E5 2670 (8c)

Operating System Linux RHEL Server 6.3

Hard Drives 8x 600GB SAS

RAM 96 GB

60
Hardware
Server computer > HP Proliant DL380 Gen9 Server

HP Proliant DL380 Gen9 Server

Figure 2-20 Front View

Figure 2-21 Rear View

Item Description Item Description

1 Drive bays 6 Ethernet Gb slots

2 Power Switch 7 VGA connector

3 USB 3.0 connectors 8 RS232

4 Reserved Slot for additional 10Gb card 9 Redundant Power supply

5 USB 2.0 connectors

61 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Server computer > HP Proliant DL380 Gen10 Server 2

Machine Configuration

Type HP DL 380 G9

Microprocessor Intel E5 2670 (8c)

Operating System Linux RHEL Server 7.5

Hard Drives 8x or 24x 900 GB SAS

RAM 128 GB

HP Proliant DL380 Gen10 Server

Figure 2-22 Front View

Figure 2-23 Rear View

Item Description Item Description

1 Drive bays 6 Ethernet Gb slots

62
Hardware
Server computer > HP Proliant DL380 Gen10 Server

Item Description Item Description

2 Power Switch 7 VGA connector

3 USB 3.0 connectors 8 RS232

4 Reserved Slot for additional 10Gb card 9 Redundant Power supply

5 USB 2.0 connectors

63 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Client Computer > Available configurations 2


Machine Configuration

Type HP DL 380 G10

Microprocessor Intel Xeon-S 4116 (12c)

Operating System Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.5

Hard Drives 8x or 24x 900 GB SAS

RAM 96 GB

Client Computer

Available configurations
The following table outlines the possible configurations available for the HP Z4xx machine.

Machine Type OS Configuration

Win 7 Win 10 Red Hat 7.3 Red Hat 7.4 Red Hat 7.5 Client-508 Client-DCM

HP Z420 X X X X X

HP Z440 X X X X X

X X X X
HP Z4 G4 X X
X X

64
Hardware
Client Computer > HP Z420

HP Z420

11 1

3
4

10

Figure 2-24 HP Z420 (rear)

Item Description Item Description

Power Supply Built-in self

1 6 USB 3.0 ports (4, blue)
test

Universal chassis clamp eth0 network interface.See Identifying

2 7
opening Ethernet interface ports (page 44)
PS/2 mouse connector
3 8 Audio line-out connector (green)
(green)

PS/2 keyboard connector

4 9 Audio line-in connector (blue)
(purple)

5 USB 2.0 ports (2, black) 10 Graphic Cards

11 Power 220V AC

65 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Client Computer > HP Z420 2

Machine Configuration

Type HP Z420

Microprocessor Intel E5 1620

HD 500GB

RAM 32 GB

Video K2200 + Adaptors displayPort/ UBS to 2 DisplayPort

OS Windows 7 64bits

66
Hardware
Client Computer > HP Z440

HP Z440

1 11
2

3
4
5
6

8
9

10

Figure 2-25 HP Z440 (rear)

Item Description Item Description

Power Supply Built-in self

1 6 USB 3.0 ports (4, blue)
test

Universal chassis clamp eth0 network interface.See Identifying

2 7
opening Ethernet interface ports (page 44)
PS/2 mouse connector
3 8 Audio line-out connector (green)
(green)

PS/2 keyboard connector

4 9 Audio line-in connector (blue)
(purple)

67 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Client Computer > HP Z440 2

Item Description Item Description

5 USB 2.0 ports (2, black) 10 Graphic Cards

11 Power 220V AC

Machine Configuration

Type HP Z440

Microprocessor Intel E5 1620

HD 500GB

RAM 96 GB

Video K2200 + Adaptors DisplayPort/ UBS to 2 DisplayPort

OS Windows 7 64bits

68
Hardware
Client Computer > HP Z4 G4

HP Z4 G4

1
11
2
3
4
5
6

8
9

10

Figure 2-26 HP Z4 G4 (rear)

Item Description Item Description

1 Power Supply Built-in self test 6 PS/2 keyboard connector (purple)

2 Universal chassis clamp opening 7 USB 3.0 ports (4, blue)

3 Audio line-in connector (blue) 8 USB 3.0 ports (2, blue)

4 Audio line-out connector (green) 6 Eth0, Eth1 network interface

5 PS/2 mouse connector (green) 10 Graphic Cards (miniDisplayPort)

11 Power 220V AC

69 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Laptop Computer > HP Z4 G4 2

Machine Configuration

Type HP Z4 G4

Microprocessor IntelXeon W2123 3.6GHz 4 cores

HD 500GB

RAM 32 GB

Video nVidia P1000 - 4minDP

OS Windows 10 64 bits - RedHat 7.3 or RedHat 7.4

Laptop Computer
This is a portable station dedicated for the management of WTU-508 in small configurations
(1000 WTU-508 max.). It hosts the client / server license DCM.

Available configurations
The following table outlines the possible configurations available for the Laptop machine.

Machine Type Configuration

DELL Precision M7710 Client/Server DCM-508

DELL Precision M7720 Client/Server DCM-508

70
Hardware
Laptop Computer > DELL Precision M7710 / M7720

DELL Precision M7710 / M7720

Figure 2-27 DELL M7710 M7720

Item Description

1 Memory card reader

2 Headphone jack

3 USB 3.0

4 Security lock

5 RJ45 port

6 Power adapter port

7 USB-C port (optional)

8 HDMI

9 Mini display port connector

10 USB 3.0

71 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Handheld Computer > DELL Precision M7710 / M7720 2

Handheld Computer
Available configurations
The following table outlines the functions available for the handheld computer.

Machine Type Functions

PSION WAP 4 DT-508, PFT-508

1 2

3 4

Figure 2-28 PSIAN WAP4 Terminal

Item Description Item Description

1 USB Dock Station 4 Additional battery

2 PSION WAP4 Terminal 5 Position of the endcap

3 Endcap RS232 / Ethernet Adaptor RJ45

Machine Configuration

Type Psion WorkAbout Pro 4 (WAP4 - 7528-S)

OS Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 Professional

RFID RFID Capture Option (CE or FCC certification)

Eth. Adaptor TetherPort --> Eth. RJ45

72
Hardware
Tablet Computer > RT12 / TA10

Tablet Computer
Available configurations
The following table outlines the functions available for the tablet computer.

Machine Type Product

DH-508 FT-508 Harvester WTU-508

RT12 x x x

TA10 x x x

xPlore C5 x

U11i x x

RT12 / TA10

Figure 2-29 RT12 / TA10

Item Description Item Description

1 10.4” resisitive MultiTouch Panel 5 Power On key

2 Shortcut keys 6 Mini-USB

3 2x USB 3.0 7 RS232

4 PCMCIA Slot 8 Ethernet RJ45 Gb Ethernet LAN

73 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
Tablet Computer > U11i 2

Item Description Item Description

9 2 batteries 5200mAh

Machine Configuration

Type Tablet PC 10.4” TETRA RT12 or TA10

OS Linux RHEL Embedded Workstation

HD 256 GB

RAM 8 GB

U11i

Figure 2-30 RT12 / TA10

Item Description Item Description

1 1 1.6" TFT (1920x1080) LCD - Capacitive 6 SmartCard / CAC Reader

2 Shortcut keys 7 Micro SD

3 1x USB 3.0 8 Ethernet RJ45 Gb Ethernet LAN

4 Display Port 9 RS232

Hot swappable Battery Pack

5 Power On key 10
4800mAh

74
Hardware
Tablet Computer > xPlore C5

Machine Configuration

Type Durabook Tablet PC 11.6" U11i Fully Rugged Tablet – GPS (U-Blox)

OS Linux RHEL Embedded Workstation (Min. RH7.5)

HD 256 GB SSD

RAM 16 GB

xPlore C5

Figure 2-31 xPlore iX104C5 tablet

Machine Configuration

Type xPlore Tablet PC 10.4” iX104C5

OS Windows 7 Professional or Windows 8

HD 256 GB

RAM 8 GB

75 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

508XT Rack
Overview
This section explains the installation of the 508XT rack with shock absorber.

Figure 2-32 508XT Rack Overview

76
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Step 1 - Bottom Shock Absorber Setup

Step 1 of 3
Material Required
• Shock absorber assembly.

Recommendations for positioning on truck floor.

• Option A

Figure 2-33 Truck Top View - Option A (Recommended)

• Option B

Figure 2-34 Truck Top View - Option B

77 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

WARNING
For rack front and rear faces orientation, please refer to information on the next
section.

Step 2 of 3
Materials Required
• Shock absorber assembly. 

78
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Bottom Shock Absorber Orientation

Figure 2-35 Attachment recommendations

WARNING
Shock absorber assembly must be oriented in such a way that absorbers 4 turns must
be on same side of front face of rack.

79 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

Recommendations for attachment on the truck floor

Step 3 of 3
Materials Required
• Shock absorber assembly.

• screws and/or fastening system adapted to floor material and truck configuration
Note As there could be several floor type and/or truck configuration, the attachment
system is not provided by Sercel. )

Figure 2-36 Top view

80
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Step 2 - Rack on Shock Absorber Assembly

1 of 3
Materials Required
• Shock absorber
assembly attached on
the floor.

• Cabinet

81 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

Instructions

CAUTION
Front face of the cabinet must be on same side of shock absorber (HH11-30 (4 turns).

82
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Flange all around the

bottom plate of
cabinet allows to
locate the cabinet
easily.

Note Reminder, front face of cabinet must be on same side of shocks absorber 4 turns.

83 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

2 of 3
Materials Required
• Cabinet put in place on shock absorber.




• Screw TH M12x40 (x4)

• Washer Flat M12 (x4)

• Nut HU M12 (x4)

84
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

In each inside bottom corner,

locate the hexagonal hole.

Insert screw inside the hexagonal

location
Add washer + nut from bottom

Screwing torque 35N.m

+ Loctite 270

85 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

3 of 3
Materials Required
• Cabinet put in place on shock absorber.

• Flange (x2)

• Screw TCHC M6x10 (x16)

• Washer Onduflex M6 (x16)

86
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Left and right flanges :

Screwing torque 7N.m

+ Loctite 270

87 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

Step 3 - Top shock absorber on rack assembly

1 of 3
Materials Required
• Cabinet (x1)

• Top shock absorber assembly (x1)

Figure 2-37 Top Shock Absorber Overview

88
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

If needed, bumpers can be relocated. (see below).

Note The goal is to absorb high lateral displacements of the top of rack in case of
shocks during transportation. 
It is possible to remove bumpers and replace by another top shock absorber
system (foam, strap,..) to be fixed on the frame.

89 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

2 of 3
Materials Required
• Cabinet (x1)

90
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

• Top shock absorber assembly (x1)

Figure 2-38 Top Shock Absorber Configurations

Several locations are possible to locate the top shock absorber on the rack.
Bumpers must be located as close as possible from the recorder wall. Provide enough space
on the 3 other sides to allow displacement in case or shock or to have access on the back of
rack.
Wall of recorder in contact with the top shock absorber must be enough stiff to absorb shocks.

91 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

3 of 3
Materials Required
• Cabinet (x1)











• Top shock absorber assembly (x1)

92
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Figure 2-39 Top Shock Absorber Assembly

93 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

Figure 2-40 Top Shock Absorber Assembly cont.

94
Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5

Step 4 - Equipment Layout in Rack Step

Figure 2-41 Rack Equipment Layout recommendations

Note Sercel recommends to install equipment in the rack in such a way that the center
of gravity shall be as low as possible (heavy equipment shall be in lower area).

95 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
508XT Rack > xPlore C5 2

Grounding Recommendations
WARNING
In order to protect personnel against electrical hazards such as electric shock and
electrocution, it is recommended that proper grounding procedures be employed.
The diagram below illustrates the recommended grounding guidelines for Sercel equipment
installed in a cabin. For this purpose, the Cabin Mount Kit (ref. 10011981) is available.

SCI‐508

SCI‐508 
Spare

DPG464

CLIENT‐508

Ethernet Switch 508

NAS 4000 / NAS 1200H

SERVER‐508

SERVER‐508
(spare)

Figure 2-42 Recommended Grounding

96
Hardware
LCD display anchoring >

LCD display anchoring

An anchoring kit (Part No. 10002055) is available from SERCEL that allows you to protect
an LCD screen from shocks when unused. Follow the procedure below to install the
anchoring kit:
1. Drill a hole (dia. 11 mm) in the table top, 170 mm from the wall. See Figure 2-43.
2. Secure the LCD Monitor Arm to the table top with the mounting parts from the tool
kit.
3. Install the display on the arm, leaving a long enough loose length of connecting
cable to allow for a 180° swing angle.
4. Swing the display through 180° backward. With the screen’s front face resting
against the wall, record the height (H) of the bottom edge above the table top (see
Figure 2-43).

LCD Monitor Arm

170
H

Figure 2-43

5. Swing the display forward.

97 February 6, 2020
 Hardware
LCD display anchoring > 2

6. Drill four holes (dia. 12 mm) in the wall, 518 mm apart horizontally, 272 mm apart
vertically, with the lowest two along a horizontal line at H + 60 mm (see Figure 2-
44).
7. Insert a hollow wall anchor into each hole. Secure the Display Anchor Base to the
wall with four screws.

Display Anchor Base Display protected from

shocks by strapping it in
8 mm Anchor Base
51
272 mm
H + 60 mm

Figure 2-44

98
Chapter

3 Server-508 Software

In this chapter:

• Standard Server-508 Configuration (page 99)

• Standalone Mode Installation (page 100)
• Server-508 Patch Installer (page 125)
• Server-508 Control Application (page 132)

508XT Installation Manual 98

Server-508 Software
Standard Server-508 Configuration >

Standard Server-508 Configuration

The 508XT system provides a kick-start installation that will configure your system
depending on the type of installation required.
508XT system software is provided in secure USB keys, for additional information see,
508XT System Software (page 35)
IMPORTANT
Prior to installing Server-508 ensure you have configured the hard disk on the HP Proliant
DL380 machine.
The Server-508 can be installed either in standalone or in co-hosted mode on the same
server machine as the Server- DCM (only with HP DL380). See, Co-hosted mode
installation (page 206).

Figure 3-1 Standard Server-508 configuration

99 February 6, 2020
 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID Configuration on HP DL380 3

Standalone Mode Installation

RAID Configuration on HP DL380

Table 1: RAID Disk Array Configuration

HP DL380 HP DL380
Item G8/ G9 / G10 G9 / G10
Description
8 disks 24 disks

Raid Type RAID 1 RAID 1

Logical Disk 1  Number of Disks 2 2

508 Appli Linux System Strip size 128 KB 128 KB

Spare Disks 0 0

Raid Type RAID 0 RAID 0

Logical Disk 2 Trace File Number of Disks 1 1

Index (SSD disk option) Strip size 256 KB 256 KB

Spare Disks 0 0

Raid Type RAID 5 RAID 6

Logical Disk 3 Trace files Number of Disks 4 18

Data PostgreSQL*
Strip size 256 KB 256 KB

Spare Disks 1 0

Raid Type RAID 1

Logical Disk 4 Number of Disks 2

PostgreSQL Strip size 256 KB

Spare Disks 1

Note * : In case of Configuration 8 disks, PostgresSQL is in the same Logical drive

than TraceFiles and Data.

100
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID Configuration on HP DL380

Recommendations before starting RAID Configuration

The following warnings and recommendations must be followed before starting 508XT
Server installation.
WARNING
Ensure that the last disk is not plugged into the Server. See Figure 3-2.
CAUTION
Ensure the USB installation key is plugged into the bottom USB port. See Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Installation recommendations

IMPORTANT
Sercel recommends that no peripherals (e.g. SCI-508) are connected to the Ethernet Port of
the Server during installation.

101 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen8 3

RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen8

This procedure will use the HP Smart Storage Administrator software (available during
machine boot) to configure hardware RAID arrays.
1. Start the Server. Ensure the USB installation key (ref. 10043346) is inserted into the
server machine.
2. When the graphical interface “HPE Proliant” appears, wait until “Option ROM
Configuration for Arrays utility” appears then “Press <F8> to run the ‘Option
ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility”.
3. In the available list select Smart Array P420i in Embedded Slot.
4. The list of available disks is displayed. Disk are not assigned. This means that a
RAID volume has not yet been created.
5. In order to create a RAID array. Click on the controller on the left pane. Then click
on the Create Array button. Select the disks to add to the Array then click OK.
6. In the left panel select the Unused Space line of the created volume, then click on
Create Logical Drive on the right side panel.
7. The following screen allows you to customize parameters of the RAID array that
you will create. Select the options as required. Then click Save.
8. The screen that follows will display all of the parameters for the RAID array. Click
Save.
See RAID parameters verification (page 105) to verify your RAID setup.

102
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9

RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9

1. Start the Server. The HPE Proliant installation screen is displayed.
2. Click F9 to view the System Utilities. Ensure the USB installation key (ref.
10043346) is inserted into the server.
3. Click enter on System Configuration.
4. Select Embedded RAID: Smart Array P440ar Controller. Then select
Configure.

5. Select Exit and Launch HP Smart storage Administrator (HPSSA).

6. Select HP Smart Storage Administrator. Click Enter. For additional information,
see the HP site.

103 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 3

7. From the Configure column. Select Logical Devices. Click Create Array.

104
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9

Creating a RAID Array

8. Once you click on Create Array. The list of available disks is displayed. 

105 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9 3

9. Select the required number of disks then click on Create Array. The following
screen, lists the parameters for the Logical Drive.
Please refer to Table 1 (page 100) for parameters according to your disk
configuration.

106
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen9

10. Once you have completed RAID disk assignment for all RAID disks, click Finish.

11. Click Exit to complete the installation.

107 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10 3

RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10

1. Power on the G10 Server. The HPE Proliant G10 installation screen is displayed.

2. Click F9 to view the System Utilities. 

Ensure the USB installation key (ref. 10043346) is inserted into the server.

108
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10

3. Click Enter on System Configuration.

109 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10 3

4. Select Embedded RAID 1: Smart Array P408i-a SR Gen10. Then click Enter.

110
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10

5. Select Configure Controller Settings.

6. Select Clear Configuration.

111 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP ProLiant DL380 Gen10 3

7. Select Delete All Array Configurations.

8. Click Submit Changes.

112
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

9. Click Back to Main Menu.

10. Click Array Configuration.
11. Click Create Array.
12. Select the Disk Array according to your configuration. See Table 1
(page 100).
13. Indicate the Strip size according to your configuration.
14. Click Submit Changes. Click Back to Main Menu.

Repeat steps 10 to 14 depending on your RAID configuration. See Table 1
(page 100).
15. Click Manage Arrays then select: Array ‘x’ → Manage Spare Drives → Assign
Dedicated Spare →select the spare drive and Assign Dedicated Spare. Return
to main menu.
Repeat step 15 for each Array previously created where:
• A or C (for 8 disks)
• D (for 24 disks)
• Array B should not be used
16. At the end of the array configuration, click Back to Main Menu then Exit.
Click Yes to save your changes. Click OK. Select Exit and click Reboot the System.

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

If for any reason you need to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on the
Server-508 (HP Proliant DL380 G8 /G9), use the procedure below.
CAUTION
-If this is a re-installation, first save the Licence Code and operating parameters, and then
power off the computer.
-This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk.

Server-508 software Installation on HPDL380 G9

This procedure assumes you have created the RAID array for your configuration. See the
previous sections.
1. Insert the 508XT v2.1 USB Key (ref. 10043346) into the server drive.
2. Power on the Server machine.
3. Press F11 to open the Boot Menu. The HPE Proliant DL380 G9 installation screen
is displayed.

113 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

IMPORTANT
A modification must be made to ensure correct installation. Two options are possible.
Option 1. To “Temporarily” boot in UEFI. With the USB Installation key inserted. Reboot
the system. Press F11. The machine enters the One-Time Boot Menu.

114
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Select Front USB. Press Enter.


Option 2. If you would like to “Permanently” change the boot mode. With the USB
Installation key inserted. Reboot the system. Press F9 to enter the system utilities.

115 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

Select Boot Mode. Press Enter.

Press Enter. A warning is displayed. Press Enter.

116
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Select UEFI Mode. Press Enter.

Press Enter. The system will reboot.

4. In the following screen, select the corresponding configuration for your installation.

5. The Linux RedHat installation screen is displayed. Click on the Date & Time button
to select your time zone and date. Click Done. Click Begin Installation.

117 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

The Linux installation will begin, this will last approximately 15 minutes. It will finish with
a system Reboot.
CAUTION
Before the system Reboots, it is recommended to remove the USB key.
6. After the system has rebooted, a window indicates that the 508 Server 2.1 is
installing
7. Once the installation is complete, a window appears indicating the number of the
ServerID. Enter the license number provided by Sercel. Then click OK.

IMPORTANT
In case of upgrade from V2.0 to 2.1, please note the License Password for V2.1 is different
than the previous License (2.0). The software license will only be valid if Patch 01 is
installed. Please contact Sercel to obtain a new license.


8. The system will Reboot. 

The 508 Server Application is started automatically once the server is running.

118
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Server-508 software Installation on HP DL380 G10

This procedure assumes you have created the RAID array for your configuration. See the
previous sections.
1. Insert the 508XT V2.1 USB Key (ref. 10043346) into the server drive.
2. Reboot the System.
3. Press F11 to open the Boot Menu.

119 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

4. In the following screen, choose the Front USB 2: USB DSK 3.0 as Boot location.
Note you may have to scroll down to locate.

5. Select G10 x HDD depending on your configuration.

120
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

6. The Linux RedHat installation screen is displayed. Click on the Date & Time button
to select your time zone and date.

7. Click Done. Click Begin Installation.

121 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

The Linux installation will begin, this will last approximately 15 minutes. It will finish with
a system Reboot.
CAUTION
Before the system Reboots, it is recommended to remove the USB key.

WARNING
Troubleshooting: If you see the following warning concerning Date & Time or Installation
Destination. Click Quit to quit the installation process and re-commence.

Figure 3-3 Installation failure

122
Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

WARNING
You may encounter some troubles during OS fresh install on HP DL380 Gen10 with 2/4 ports
10GbE board mounted. The following message may appear: « An unknown error has
occured »

First, hit <Ctrl> <Alt> <F2> to bring up the Terminal display. Enter the command “lsblk”
to list all active drives on server. This behaviour may occur when drives are randomly
detected. Thus, the live USB installation key takes place on first active drive (sda), normally
assigned for system partition (RAID1).

123 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

Workaround:
1. Reboot the server.
2. Hit <F9> at startup to enter to the BIOS.
3. Navigate to the following menu: 
“System Configuration > BIOS/Platform Configuration > Network Options >
Network Boot Options”.
4. Select “PCIe Slot Network Boot”.
5. Now, disable any PXE boot slots
6. Press <F12> to save and reboot the server. 
Now you can retry the installation procedure. 

7. After the system has rebooted, a window indicates that the 508 Server will install.
8. Once the installation is completed, a window appears indicating the number of the
ServerID. At this point you must enter the license number provided by Sercel. Then
click OK.

IMPORTANT
In case of upgrade from V2.0 to 2.1, please note the License Password for V2.1 is different
than the previous License (2.0). The software license will only be valid if Patch 01 is
installed. Please contact Sercel to obtain a new license.

9. The system will Reboot. 

The 508 Server Application is started automatically once the server is running.

124
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Server-508 Patch Installer

Overview
This application is automatically installed on the user508 Desktop once you have installed
the Server-508 Control Application software.
You open it by double-clicking on the Server-508Patch Installer Icon
It allows you to:
1. Install a Server-508 Application Patch and check the information of the files
changed by the Patch.
2. Uninstall a Server-508 Application Patch.
3. Check the Readme of the a Server-508 Application Patch.

Installing a Server-508 Application Patch

Software patches, if any, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in incremental order.
You must install all Mandatory-type patches.
To install a Server-508 Application patch:
1. Stop the server by clicking on the Remote Control Server button of the 508XT Client
Launcher bar. Then selecting Stop 508 Server. See Figure 3-6 (page 127).
2. Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the Server-508
Patcher icon on the desktop

Figure 3-4

125 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

3. Click on the Install New Patch(s) button in the Patch Installer window. A warning
window appears to remind you to stop the Server-508 Application before install
patch. Click OK.
4. The PatchFile Chooser is open.

Remove Patch 
Selected
From the list

Figure 3-5

To Select the Patches one by one, press “+”

Use the browser to find the patch file (XX508_xxxxxx_V2.1_Patchxx.jar format)
For example:
CU508_Client_V2.1_Patch01.jar for the Client
CU508_Server_V2.1_Patch01.jar for the Server
FT508_Server_V2.1_Patch01.jar for the FT-508
+
To select a group of patches located in a directory, press“ +”

126
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

To remove one patch from the list, press the “X”.

5. Click on the Install.
6. Start the server by clicking on the Remote Control Server button of the 508XT Client
Launcher bar.

Figure 3-6 Start / Stop 508 Server

7. The system is ready for operation.

Interface Level
The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented, depending on the changes
implemented by the patch. To view the Interface Level, click on the top-level (server or
client) folder in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Details tab. The Interface Level
is used to check for compatibility between Server-508 and 508Client Application each

127 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

time any user connects to the server (if interface levels do not match, an error message
appears and the connection request is rejected).

Figure 3-7 Interface Level check

128
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Server-508 Patch Readme

The Readme of the Patch provides information about bugs fixed, and software
improvements.
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the ReadMe tab on the right panel.

Figure 3-8

Server-508 Patch Details

The Details of a patch allows to check some information about it (Version of Server-508
Application, etc…) and the action planned to be done on files (UPDATE, ADD, etc…)
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the Details tab on the right panel.

129 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server 3

Figure 3-9 Read Me

Server-508 Patch Log

The Logs of a patch allow to check the different action done on the files during the
installation.
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the Log tab on the right panel.

130
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V7.5 Server

Figure 3-10 Patch Log

131 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch 3

Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch

If you wish to uninstall any patches, you must perform it in decremental order (starting from
the highest number).
To un-install a Server-508 Application patch follow the procedure below:
1. Stop the server by clicking on the Remote Control Server button of the 508XT Client
Launcher bar. Then selecting Stop 508 Server.

Figure 3-11 Stop Server command

2. Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the Server-508
Patcher icon on the desktop.
3. Select the patch to uninstall in the Left panel and right-click on it

Figure 3-12

A context popup is open to propose you to uninstall the patch.

132
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Patch Installer > Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch

4. Click on uninstall. The patch will be deleted from the server and the files changed
by the patch recover the previous state before installation of this patch.
5. Start the server by clicking on the Remote Control Server button of the 508XT Client
Launcher bar.

Figure 3-13

6. The system is ready for operation.

133 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Control Application > Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch 3

Server-508 Control Application

Overview
This application is automatically installed on the user508 Desktop.
You open it by double-clicking on the Server-508 Control Panel Icon

Figure 3-14

The 508 Server control panel allows you to:

1. Start / Stop / Restart Server Application. 
However, we recommend Starting / Stopping the Server via the 508XT Client
Application Launcher bar, Remote Server Control button. See Figure 3-6
(page 127).
2. Check Server log.
3. Check Session status.

134
Server-508 Software
Server-508 Control Application > Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch

Server log
The Server Log allows you to follow some software traces. It is reserved for special analysts.

Figure 3-15 Server Log

135 February 6, 2020

 Server-508 Software
Server-508 Control Application > Uninstalling a Server-508 Application Patch 3

136
Chapter

4 Client-508 Software

In this chapter:

• Standard Client-508 Configuration (page 135)

• Standalone Mode Installation (page 135)
• Client-508 Patch Installer (page 143)

508XT Installation Manual 134

Client-508 Software
Standard Client-508 Configuration > Prerequisites

Standard Client-508 Configuration

The following Operating Software can be used for Client-508 host computers:
• Linux RedHat
• Windows 7 / Windows 10
This manual does not include any specific procedure for installing Windows. If required,
contact your system administrator to install Windows.
Prior to installing Client-508 software, it is recommended to create a 508 user account
(user508) with administrator privileges.Then, log in with that user account to install
Client-508 software.
For a list of referenced client machines, see Client Computer (page 64).

Prerequisites
CAUTION
Any new installation will erase all previous 508 data. Ensure you have saved 508
setups (if available) before re-installing.

Re-installation
1. Ensure to save the Licence codes and operating parameters .
2. Uninstall the former release.

Operating System
Ensure the Operating System on the Client PC is installed.

Standalone Mode Installation

Windows Client Installation

Creating User account

To Disable User Account Control:
1. Open the User Account Control settings dialog box (select Control Panel > User
Accounts and Family Safety > User Accounts).
2. Drag down the slider to the Never Notify position.

135 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Windows Client Installation 4

3. Click OK.

User508
Administrator

Figure 4-1

4. From the Windows 7 start menu, select Control Panel > System and Security >
Windows Firewall. Turn off the firewall

Figure 4-2

136
Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Client-508 Application Software

Installing Client-508 Application Software

1. Power on the Client computer.
2. In the “Client-508 Login” window, choose “Others”, then:
- Type user508
- Enter user508 as password
3. Insert the Server 508 V2.1 installation key (ref. 10043346).
4. Browse the directories on the key and find the directory to the sercel\resources
folder
5. Double-click on c0v2.1-SNAPSHOT_508_Client_windows.exe and the Sercel
Product Installation Multiplatform starts.
Wait until the installation wizard appears (this may take a few minutes).
6. In the “Welcome to the installShield Wizard” window, click Next.
7. In the “Client-508 2.1 Location” window, leave the default directory. Click Next.
8. A popup message appears to invite you to create the directory. Click Yes.
The installer confirms the directory of installation. Click Next.
9. In the “License Agreement” window carefully read the terms of the agreement. If
you accept the term of License agreement, Choose “Yes”. Click Next.
10. Wait until the system says installation completed. Click Finish.
11. A popup window “installation uncorrect” from Windows7 system may appear.
Choose : “Instalation is correct”
12. Reboot the system.

Figure 4-3 Default Desktop after first installation.

137 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Operating system Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.5 4

Special Procedure for setting up 4 NEC screens on Windows

These instructions outline the procedure for connecting 4 MultiSync EA271Q NEC display
monitors while running Windows 10.
1. Access the Nvidia Control Panel and navigate to Display then Setup Multiple
Displays. From here you can specify how you want to use multiple displays.

2. Move the order of the screens (left to right) ensuring that the primary display is on
the left side.

Installing Operating system Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.5

Client-508 Software installation on HPZ420 / HPZ440

1. Insert the USB 508XT Client software installation key (ref. 10047754) into the
HPZ420/440 machine.
2. Reboot your computer.
3. Boot on the USB Key by pressing (F9) before Linux is started.

138
Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Operating system Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.5

4. The Boot Menu is displayed.

Figure 4-4

5. Select the corresponding USB key. (e.g. Kanguru SS3)

6. Click to Install the Sercel 508 Client Software on HP.
7. Enter the Date & Time information.
8. The installation will begin. It should last approximately 15 minutes. If the
installation was successful, the following message will appear.

Figure 4-5

9. Restart your computer.

139 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Operating system Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.5 4

Client-508 Software installation on HP Z4 G4

Client Machine complete (re-)installation request.
Before starting installation, ensure all screens are connected: with miniDP/DP cable and 
DP/DP cable
1. Reboot your computer.
2. Press F1 key on keyboard.
3. Pres ESC to enter the Startup Menu.
4. Select BIOS Setup.
5. Go to the Advanced Tab and choose Secure Boot Configuration.
6. In the Menu Configure Legacy Support and Secure Boot, select “Legacy Support
ENABLE and Secure Boot DISABLE”.
CAUTION
This step is mandatory to avoid any trouble after graphic driver installation.
7. Reboot the machine.
8. Upon reboot, Press F1 key on keyboard.
9. Enter the --> BIOS Boot Menu and choose UEFI USB key, then click Apply.
10. Change Time Zone and modify the Hour if necessary.
11. Press Begin INSTALLATION
12. Reboot your machine and remove the USB key.
13. Install Client-508 Patches up to the latest Patch: all patches must be installed at the
same time. See, Installing a Client Application Patch (page 143).
14. Reboot the machine.
15. Open a Terminal window, change user to superUser root (#)
16. If you have not done so, copy the following file from the Sercel Customer FTP site.
ftp://[email protected]/tools/nvidia/graphicInstall4.2.sh
17. Restart your machine by using the Linux menus.
18. Linux is launched on 4 active screens (you may have to re-order the screens). See
procedure below.
19. Launch Client-508 application.

Special Procedure for setting up 4 NEC screens on Linux

These instructions outline the procedure for connecting 4 MultiSync EA271Q NEC display
monitors while running Linux.

140
Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Setting Client-508 Machine IP address

1. Access the NVDIA X Server settings, under Application --> Settings. Go to the
section X Server Display Configuration:.

Figure 4-6 NVIDIA Layout configuration screen

2. Move the order of the screens (left to right) ensuring that the primary display is on
the left side.
3. Ensure the left most screen has the check box option ‘Make this the primary display
for the X screen”.

Setting Client-508 Machine IP address

1. Select “Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center >
Change adapter settings”.
2. Right-Click on Local Area Connection.
3. Select “Properties”.

141 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Setting Client-508 Machine IP address 4

4. Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”.

5. Click in Properties.
6. Choose the “Use the following IP Address”.
7. In the IP address field, enter “172.27.128.2” (Address must be between : .2 to .9 for
the last number).
8. In the subnet mask, enter “255.255.255.0”.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Close.

142
Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Installing a Client Application Patch

Client-508 Patch Installer

This application is automatically installed on the user508 Desktop.
Open it by double-clicking on the 508 Client Patch Installer Icon
It allows the end-user to:
• Install a Client-508 Application Patch and check the information of the files changed by
the Patch.
• Uninstall a Client-508 Application Patch.
• Check the Readme of the a Client-508 Application Patch.

Installing a Client Application Patch

Software patches, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in incremental order. You
must install all ‘Mandatory’ type patches.
To install a Client-508 Application patch:
1. Open the Client Patch Installer window, by clicking on the Client-508 Patcher icon
on the desktop,

Figure 4-7 508 Client Patch Installer shortcut icon

143 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Installing a Client Application Patch 4

2. The Sercel Client Patch installer is displayed.

Figure 4-8 508 Client Patcher Installer

3. Click on the Install New Patch(s) button in the Patch Installer window. 
A warning window appears to remind you to stop the Client-508 Application
before install patch. Click OK.

144
Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Installing a Client Application Patch

4. The Patch File Chooser is open.

Patch File chooser

Sercel

508Client

Patch File chooser

c1V10s5.jar

Patch Directory chooser

Sercel

508Client
Remove Patch 
Selected
From the list

C:\Sercel

Figure 4-9 Patch File Chooser

To Select the Patch one by one, press “+”.

Use the browser to find the patch file (XX508_xxxx_V2.1_Patchxx.jar format)
For example:
CU508_Client_V2.1_Patch01.jar for the Client
To select a group of patch located in a directory, press“ ++”
To remove one patch from the list, press the “X”
1. Click on Install.
2. The system is ready for operation.

Interface Level
The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented, depending on the changes
implemented by the patch. To view the Interface Level, click on the top-level (server or
client) folder in the Patch Installer window, then click on the Details tab. The Interface Level
is used to check for compatibility between 508Server and Client-508 Application each
time any user connects to the server (if interface levels do not match, an error message
appears and the connection request is rejected).

145 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Installing a Client Application Patch 4

Figure 4-10 Interface Level check

Client-508 Patch Readme

The Readme of the Patch provides information about fixed bugs, and software
improvements.
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the ReadMe tab on the right panel.

 Client-508 Patch Details

Figure 4-11

146
Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Installing a Client Application Patch

The Details of a patch provides some information about it (Version of Client-508

Application, etc…) and the action planned to be done on files (UPDATE, ADD, etc…)
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the Details tab on the right panel.
 

Figure 4-12

147 February 6, 2020

 Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Uninstalling a Client Application Patch 4

Client-508 Patch Log

The Logs of a patch allow to check the different actions done on the files during the
installation.
1. Select the patch in the list in the left panel.
2. Select the Log tab on the right panel.

Figure 4-13

Uninstalling a Client Application Patch

If you wish to uninstall any patches, you must perform it in decremental order (starting from
the highest number).
To uninstall a Client-508 Application patch follow the procedure below:
1. At the Login prompt, type in as user508, (password user508).
2. If necessary Close all Client-508 java windows
3. Open the Client Patch Installer window, by clicking on the Client-508 Patcher icon
on the desktop.
4. Select the patch to uninstall in the Left panel and right-click.

148
Client-508 Software
Client-508 Patch Installer > Uninstalling a Client Application Patch

Figure 4-14 Uninstall Patch

A context popup opens to propose you to uninstall the patch.

5. Click on uninstall. The patch will be deleted from the client machine and the files
changed by the patch recovered from the previous state before installation of this
patch.
6. The system is ready for operation.

149 February 6, 2020

Chapter

5 Server-DCM Software

This chapter describes how to install and un-install Server-DCM

software,

• Standard Server-DCM Configuration (page 151)

• Standalone Mode Installation (page 152)
• RAID configuration on HP DL380
• RAID configuration on HP Z840
• Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server
• Executing system post-configuration
• Installing Server-DCM application software
• Co-hosted Mode Installation (page 185)
• Customize Server-508 configuration
• Installing Server-DCM application software
• DCM Patch Installer (page 193)
• Un-installing Server-DCM application software
(page 194)
• Customize Server-428 Configuration (page 195)

508XT Installation Manual 150

Server-DCM Software
Standard Server-DCM Configuration >

Standard Server-DCM Configuration

The DCM system can be installed either in standalone or in co-hosted mode on the same
server machine as the 508XT system (only with DL380).
Installing DCM co-hosted with the 508XT is essentially used in the following situations:
• In mixed operation i.e. cable and wireless traces in spread.
• In wireless operation i.e. wireless traces only with the 508XT controlling the shooting
system.
Installing DCM in standalone mode is used in the following situations:
• In mixed operation but in demanding environments i.e. high channel count (it is
recommended to have separate machines for DCM and the 508XT)
• In wireless operation with autonomous source (the recorder does not control the shooting
system)
The DCM supported hardware platforms are:
• HP DL380 Gen8/9/10 (Rackable Server)
• HP Z840 (Server workstation)
• DELL M7720 (Client on Server Laptop)
• HP Z440 (Client station)

It is also possible to install DCM on a non Sercel-specific platform. However, Sercel does
not guarantee the successful installation and Sercel is not engaged in delivering the standard-
spec product performance & reliability on non-officially supported hardware platforms.
The custom (Laptop DCM) installation is essentially offered for testing purposes only or for
very limited deployments at the risk of the user. Note also that the custom installation feature
is not compatible with the co-hosted installation of both DCM and the 508XT.

151 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

Standalone Mode Installation

RAID configuration on HP DL380
This procedure will use the HP Smart Storage Administrator software (available during
machine boot) to configure hardware RAID arrays depending on available disks:

HP DL380 Gen8/9/10
16 disks 24 disks 25 disks
RAID Type RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1
Logical disk 1: Number of disks 2 2 2
Operating
System Strip size 256 KB 256 KB 256 KB
Spare disks 0 0 0
RAID Type RAID 6 (ADG) RAID 6 (ADG) RAID 6 (ADG)
Logical disk 2: Number of disks 12 20 21
Data Strip size 256 KB 256 KB 256 KB
Spare disks 2 2 2

We will also configure the array to allow the use of the cache while the cache battery is
recharging.

152
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380

1. During the machine boot, press “F10 Intelligent Provisioning” to enter the array
configuration interface.

2. Select “HPE Smart Storage Administrator”.

153 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

3. Click on the “Configure button”.

4. Click on the “Create Array”.

154
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380

5. Select the 2 first hard drives (Bay 1 and Bay 2) in the list and click on “Create
Array” button.

155 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

6. Keep the default option and click on “Create Logical Drive” to create the RAID 1
array for the operating system partition.

156
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380

7. Finally, click on “Finish” button to complete the procedure for this first RAID
configuration.

8. Now, to create the RAID array for data partition, click on “Create Array” button.

157 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

9. Select all except the last 2 drives for a total of 20 selected hard drives then click on
“Create Array” button.

158
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380

10. Select “RAID 6 (ADG)” option for RAID level and then click on “Create Logical
Drive” to create the RAID 6 array for the data partition.

159 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

11. Click on “Manage Spare Drives”.

160
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380

12. Select the 2 remaining hard drives then click on “Save” then “Finish” button to
complete the procedure for this second and last RAID configuration.

13. On the left panel, select “Cache Manager” then click on “Modify Caching
Settings” button.

161 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP DL380 5

14. Leave the cache ratio to “10%/90%” and change the “Enable Write Cache …” to
“Enabled” and click on “OK” button.

15. The array configuration is now complete and you can exit using the “X” in the top
right and reboot the machine.

WARNING
After array creation, the RAID controller performs background initialization of the
arrays. While safe to use, this may result in slightly degraded performance. The
initialization will take several hours to complete (depending on disks number),
longer if the server is in active use. The progress of the initialization can be viewed
from the HP Smart Storage Administrator software.

162
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

RAID configuration on HP Z840

The HP Z840 is equipped with two RAID controllers:
• The LSI-SAS2308 controller
• Embedded on the Z840 motherboard
• Used to manage the RAID level 1 array hosting the RHEL
operating system
• Made of 2 Seagate ST3600057SS 600 GB capacity hard disks
• Configurable on boot and accessible through the “CTRL+C”
keyboard shortcut
• The LSI-SAS9270 controller
• Separate PCI-Express card
• Used to manage the RAID level 5 array hosting the DCM database
• Made of 8 Seagate ST1200MM0007 1.2TB capacity hard disks
• Configurable on boot and accessible through the “CTRL+H” keyboard shortcut

Setting up Operating System RAID array:

1. At the machine boot, press “Space” to display boot information in full screen.

163 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

2. During LSI main controller initialization, press “CTRL+C” to enter the RAID array
configuration.

3. Select the “LSISAS2308” adapter and press “Enter” on keyboard.

164
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

4. Select the “RAID Properties” option and press “Enter” on keyboard.

5. Select the “Create RAID 1 Volume” option and press “Enter” on keyboard.

165 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

6. Add the 2 hard drives in the RAID 1 array by setting RAID Disk option to “Yes”
using “+/-“ on keyboard.

7. Press “C” on keyboard to create the RAID volume.

8. Press “Esc” on keyboard and accept “Save changes then exit this menu” option.

166
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

9. On the Adapter properties screen, press “Esc” again on keyboard and accept “Exit
the Configuration Utility and Reboot” option.

10. The Z840 machine will reboot. The RAID 1 array for Operating System is now
configured.

167 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

Setting up Data RAID array:

1. At the machine boot, press “Space” to display boot information in full screen.

2. During the LSI secondary controller initialization, press “CTRL+H” to enter the
RAID array configuration.

3. Select the “LSI MegaRAID SAS9270-8i” adapter and press “Start” button.

168
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

4. Select the “Configuration Wizard” option.

5. Select the “New Configuration” option and click “Next”.

169 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

6. Accept to clear the RAID configuration by answering “Yes”.

7. Select the “Virtual Drive Configuration” option and click “Next”.

8. Select the “Manual Configuration” option and click “Next”.

170
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

9. Select the “Slot: 0, SAS, HDD, …” option and click “Add to Array”.

10. Repeat the step below for “Slot 1” to “Slot 7”, then click “Accept DG” and then
“Next”.

171 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

11. Click “Add to SPAN” and then “Next”.

12. Change the “RAID level” to “RAID 5” and click “Update Size”.

172
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

13. Check that “Write Policy” option is set to “Write Back with BBU” then click
“Accept”.

14. Answer “Yes” to accept “Write Policy” option to be temporary turned-off during
BBU charging.

15. Click “Next”.

173 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

16. Click “Accept” to save the RAID drive group configuration.

17. Answer “Yes” to accept saving.

18. Click “Cancel” to keep the SSD caching disable.

174
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840

19. Answer “Yes” to initialize the new virtual drives.

20. Select the “Slow Initialize” option and click “Go”.

21. Click “Yes” to proceed with the RAID initialization.

175 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > RAID configuration on HP Z840 5

22. A progress bar with percentage will show the progress of the RAID initialization.
This step could take a few hours to be completed, do not restart or shutdown the
machine during this phase.

23. Once the RAID initialization is complete, click “Home” to return to the main menu
of the RAID configuration tool.
24. On the main page, click “Exit” then “Yes” for exit confirmation.

25. The Z840 machine will reboot. The RAID level 5 array for Data partition is now
configured.

176
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server

If you need to install or re-install the Redhat Linux Operating System on the Server-DCM,
use the procedure below.
The installation of the Server-DCM is automatic. It follows a script in a kick-start delivered
with DCM v2.1 Installation.
1. Insert the DCM v2.1 RedHat Installation USB key (ref. 10040209) into the
Server’s USB port.
2. Power on the Server Machine.
3. Press “F11” to open the Boot Menu.

177 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server 5

4. Select the Boot location.

5. Choose the corresponding configuration for your installation.

6. Set up the “Date & Time” and “Keyboard” mapping then click on “Begin
Installation” button.

178
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server

WARNING
You may encounter some troubles during OS fresh install on HP DL380 Gen10 with 2/4 ports
10GbE board mounted. The following message may appear: «An unknown error has
occurred»

First, hit <Ctrl> <Alt> <F2> to show up the Terminal display. Enter the command “lsblk”
to list all active drives on server. This behaviour may occurs when drives are randomly
detected. Thus, the live USB installation key takes place on first active drive (sda), normally
assigned for system partition (RAID1).

179 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux v7.5 Server 5

Workaround:
1. Reboot the server.
2. Hit <F9> at startup to enter to the BIOS.
3. Navigate to the following menu : 
“System Configuration > BIOS/Platform Configuration > Network Options >
Network Boot Options”.
4. Select “PCIe Slot Network Boot”.
5. Now, disable any PXE boot slots
6. Press <F12> to save and reboot the server. 
Now you can retry the installation procedure. 

7. The Linux installation will begin. At the end of the install process, the system will
restart automatically.

180
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Executing system post-configuration

Executing system post-configuration

For the optimal execution of DCM, the operating system needs a few customizations to be
run:
1. Power on the server computer.
2. Open a Root session in logon window, type “root” as login and “administrator” as
password.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. In a Terminal window, type the following commands:

5. The customization is done automatically. Just choose “Yes” to start the operating
system configuration.

6. Once the operating system configuration has been run, click “OK” and choose
“Yes” to automatically restart the machine.

181 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

WARNING
If the following error appears when starting the operating system configuration utility, you
have to reinstall the operating system as either the file “/export/home/dcm_install.conf”
goes missing or is corrupted.

Installing Server-DCM application software

The following instructions are to install the DCM applications on RedHat Enterprise Linux
v7.4 server:
1. Power on the DCM server.
2. Open a User session in logon window, type “root” as login and “administrator” as
the password .
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. In a Terminal window, type the following commands:

182
Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software

5. Follow the installer instructions on screen to proceed with the installation.

183 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Standalone Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

6. You must accept terms of the license agreement by clicking “Yes” then “Next”.

7. Click on “Next”.

184
Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Customize Server-508 configuration

8. Enter the License key provided by Sercel then click “Next”.

9. Once the installation is finished, eject the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key and
remove it.
10. Restart the server.

Co-hosted Mode Installation

Customize Server-508 configuration
The following instructions are to install the DCM application software on a pre-installed
Server-508 station under RedHat Enterprise Linux v7.5:
1. Power on the 508XT server.
2. Open a User session in logon window, type “root” as login and “administrator” as
password.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. Pre-installed operating systems do not allow execution of scripts from removable
drives. You have to mount manually the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key with
special permission.

185 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Customize Server-508 configuration 5

5. In a Terminal window, type the following commands to obtain the Drive Name of
USB key (i.e. sdc1):

Then:

6. Follow the installer instructions on screen to proceed with the installation.

186
Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Customize Server-508 configuration

7. At next step, you must accept terms of the license agreement by clicking “Yes” then
“Next” twice.

187 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

8. Enter the License key provided by Sercel then click “Next”.

9. Once the installation is finished, eject the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key and
remove it.
10. Restart the server.

Installing Server-DCM application software

The following instructions are to install the DCM applications on RedHat Enterprise Linux
v7.4 server:
1. Power on the DCM server.
2. Open a User session in logon window, type “root” as login and “administrator” as
the password.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. In a Terminal window, type the following commands:

188
Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software

5. Follow the installer instructions on screen to proceed with the installation.

189 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

6. At next step, you must accept terms of the license agreement by clicking “Yes” then
“Next”.

190
Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software

7. Click on “Next”.

191 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Co-hosted Mode Installation > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

8. Enter the License key provided by Sercel then click “Next”.

9. Once the installation is finished, eject the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key and
remove it.
10. Restart the server.

192
Server-DCM Software
DCM Patch Installer > Installing Server-DCM application software

DCM Patch Installer

This patcher is installed automatically on the server once you have installed the Server-DCM
application software. The Server’s patcher shortcut is accessible from this directory: “/
export/home/userdcm/dcmpatcher/dcmpatcher.sh”.

It allows you to:

1. Install a DCM application patch and get information about files changed by the
patch.
2. Uninstall a DCM application patch.
3. Check the Readme for each individual patches.

WARNING
Before installing/uninstalling application patches, you have to stop DCM services by typing
“dcm stop” command in a Terminal window. After patches installation, the Client Interface
Level should match with the Server Interface Level.

193 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Un-installing Server-DCM application software > Installing Server-DCM application software 5

To install a new patch, you must remove any older one. Right-click on the patch shows up
the “Uninstall” menu.
1. Click on “Install new patch(s)” button.
2. Click on “Add files” button to select the patch then click “Ok”.
3. The patching process starts and the installation progress is shown in Messages table.
4. Once patching is done, you get access to the Read me file and Patch log.
5. Type “dcm start” command in a Terminal window.

Un-installing Server-DCM application software

If, for any reason, you need to un-install the Server-DCM application software, use the
following procedure:
1. Login as “root” (standalone server or co-hosted server).
2. In a Terminal window, run the following commands:
# /export/home/dcm/patch/uninstall/uninstall
# rm -rf /export/home/dcm

3. Reboot the server.

194
Server-DCM Software
Customize Server-428 Configuration > Simultaneous operation with a 428XL system

Customize Server-428 Configuration

This section describes the installation procedures required to operate the DCM in
compatibility mode with a 428XL system.

Simultaneous operation with a 428XL system

In the situation where the shooting system is to be controlled by 428XL, the DCM server may
be networked with a 428XL system. In this case, the DCM can be configured to import 
SEG-D files from the 428XL as illustrated below.

Figure 5-1 DCM import SEG-D files configuration

In this scenario, the 428XL system must be configured to allow shared access to the files.

195 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Customize Server-428 Configuration > Sharing SEGD files with 428XL 5

Sharing SEGD files with 428XL

This section explains the NFS settings to apply for sharing SEGDs between the 428XL and
the DCM in the case of installation for simultaneous operation.
1. On the 428XL server machine, log in as root.
2. Create a:

/var/dump/.uniteExport
link to the

/var/dump/.dcmExport
directory:

# mkdir /var/dump/.uniteExport
# chmod ugo+rwx /var/dump/.uniteExport

3. Configure the NFS share /var/dump/.uniteExport:

# echo “/var/dump/.uniteExport *(rw,sync)” >> /etc/exports

# grubby --update-kernel=ALL --args="nfsd.nfs4_disable_idmapping=1"

4. Reboot the machine and login as user428.

Setting up SEGD export in the 428XL frontend software

A default export configuration file is created in the user428 home directory on the 428XL
machine:

/export/home/user428/uniteExport.conf

(or /users/user428/uniteExport.conf)
This file describes parameters for exporting to the DCM. Below is its default content:

EXPORT_UNITE_STATE OFF

MAX_NUMBER_OF_FILES_IN_BUFFER 200

EXPORT_RAW_FILES YES

EXPORT_DUMP_FILES YES
By default, exporting is disabled. To enable exporting to DCM, you must edit the
configuration file and change the EXPORT_UNITE_STATE flag from «OFF» to «ON»
(leaving the other parameters unchanged).

196
 Server-DCM Software
Customize Server-428 Configuration > Setting up NFS on the DCM server machine

For exports to the DCM to be enabled, the file content should therefore read:

EXPORT_UNITE_STATE ON

MAX_NUMBER_OF_FILES_IN_BUFFER 200

EXPORT_RAW_FILES YES

EXPORT_DUMP_FILES YES
Once the file is modified to enable exporting, when the operator goes to On Line in the e-428
jConfig window a message indicating that exporting is enabled is displayed in the Status
Mail pane (if the message is not there, this means exporting is not enabled, so you should
open the configuration file and check its content).
Note Test files and synthetic files are not exported (only RAW and DUMP-type files
are).

Setting up NFS on the DCM server machine

To set the DCM server to automatically access the shared directory you have to set up on the
428XL server, do the following:
1. Log in as root.
2. Create a directory that the Unite network share will be mounted to. Open a command
prompt and type:
mkdir /import
3. Open the auto mount master file:
gedit /etc/auto.master
4. Add the following line to this file:
/import /etc/auto.import --timeout 0 --ghost
5. Save and quit the text editor.
6. Create and open the auto mount detail file:
gedit /etc/auto.import
7. Add the following text (make sure a space character is inserted between 8192 and
172.27.128.1) into the auto.import file:

segd -rw,soft,intr,retrans=1,timeo=5,rsize=8192,wsize=8192 172.27.128.1:/var/dump/.uniteExport

8. Save and quit the text editor.

9. Remove the default symlink to the folder where SEG-D files are to be looked up in
the /var/dump/.dcm folder:
rm /var/dump/.dcm/import

197 February 6, 2020

 Server-DCM Software
Customize Server-428 Configuration > Setting up NFS on the DCM server machine 5

10. Create a link to the NFS mount instead:

ln -s /import/segd /var/dump/.dcm/import
11. Enable autofs when Red Hat starts:
systemctl enable autofs.service
12. Log out of root and log back in as userdcm.

198
Chapter

6 Client-DCM Software

This chapter describes how to install and un-install Client-DCM

software

• Standalone mode installation (page 200)

• Installing Operating System software
• Executing system post-configuration
• Installing Client-DCM applications suite
• Co-hosted mode installation (page 206)
• Installing Client-DCM application suite
• DCM Patch Installer (page 208)
• Un-installing Client-DCM applications suite (page 210)

508XT Installation Manual 199

 Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Installing Operating System software 6

Standalone mode installation

Installing Operating System software
IMPORTANT
The DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key (ref. 10040199) provides you a complete
installation solution under RedHat Linux.
However, if you need to use DCM applications on a Microsoft Windows 7/10 client
station (assuming that Operating System is already installed, Firewall and Energy
saving are disabled), you will find the installer executable in this directory:
“<Drive>:\dcm_2.0\windows\client\dcm_clients_installer_2.0.0_windows.exe”
Installing RedHat Enterprise Linux Server v7.4:

1. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key on available USB port then power on the
computer.
2. Press the boot sequence accessing key at start up (ex: “F9” on HP Z440, “F12” on
Dell M7720).
3. Select the “Install DCM 2.0 client” menu.

CAUTION
For HP Z4 G4 machines, when installing Linux OS, ensure that you connect only
one screen.
4. Enter the --> BIOS Change Boot legacy & secure boot param to “Legacy Support
ENABLE and Secure Boot DISABLE”

WARNING
This step is mandatory to avoid any trouble after graphic driver installation.

200
Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Installing Operating System software

5. The installation will be start by clicking on “Begin installation” button. Defining

the “Date & Time” parameters and “Keyboard” mapping could be required at this
step.

6. At the end of the install process, the system will restart automatically.
7. After Machine restart. Open a terminal, and execute the graphicInstall4.2 script
copied from Official Sercel FTP Site (tools/nvidia).

201 February 6, 2020

 Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Executing system post-configuration 6

Executing system post-configuration

For the optimal execution of DCM, the operating system needs a few customizations to be
run:
1. Power on the client computer.
2. Open a Root session in logon window, type “root” as login and “administrator” as
password.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. In a Terminal window, type the following commands:

5. The customization is done automatically. Just choose “Yes” to start the operating
system configuration.

6. Once the operating system configuration has been run, click “OK” and choose
“Yes” to automatically restart the machine.

202
Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Installing Client-DCM applications suite

WARNING
If the following error appears when starting the operating system configuration utility, you
have to reinstall the operating system as either the file “/export/home/dcm_install.conf” is
missing or is corrupted.

Installing Client-DCM applications suite

The following instructions are to install the DCM applications on RedHat Enterprise Linux
v7.4 client station:
1. Power on the DCM client computer.
2. Open a User session in logon window, type “userdcm” as login and leave the
password blank.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. In a Terminal window, type the following commands:

203 February 6, 2020

 Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Installing Client-DCM applications suite 6

5. Follow the installer instructions on screen to proceed with the installation.

204
Client-DCM Software
Standalone mode installation > Installing Client-DCM applications suite

6. Once the installation is finished, remove the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key and
double-click the “DCM” icon on the desktop to launch Complete application.

CAUTION
You may have bad definition on the Screen #1 (Master Screen). to recover the best
graphic definition, SwitchOFF, then SwitchON the screen.

205 February 6, 2020

 Client-DCM Software
Co-hosted mode installation > Installing Client-DCM application suite 6

Co-hosted mode installation

Installing Client-DCM application suite

The following instructions are to install the DCM applications on a pre-installed Client-508
station under RedHat Enterprise Linux v7.5:
1. Power on the client computer.
2. Open a User session in logon window, type “user508” as login and “user508” as
password.
3. Insert the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key into free USB port.
4. Pre-installed operating systems do not allow execution of scripts from removable
drives. You have to mount manually the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key with
special permission.
In a Terminal window, type the following commands to obtain the Drive Name of
USB key (i.e. sdc1):

Then:

206
Client-DCM Software
Co-hosted mode installation > Installing Client-DCM application suite

5. Follow the installer instructions on screen to proceed with the installation.

6. Once the installation is finished, remove the DCM 2.0 Installation USB Key (Right
click on shortcut then Eject) and double-click the “DCM” icon on the desktop to
launch the DCM main application.

207 February 6, 2020

 Client-DCM Software
DCM Patch Installer > Installing Client-DCM application suite 6

DCM Patch Installer

This patcher is installed automatically on the Client station once you have installed the
Client-DCM or Server-DCM applications suite. The Client’s patcher shortcut is located in
menu: Application > Sercel > Patcher.

It allows you to:

1. Install a DCM application patch and get information about files changed by the
patch.
2. Uninstall a DCM application patch.
3. Check the Readme for each individual patches.

208
Client-DCM Software
DCM Patch Installer > Installing Client-DCM application suite

WARNING
Before installing/uninstalling application patches, you have to close all DCM applications.
After patches installation, the Client Interface Level should match with the Server
Interface Level.

To install a new patch, you must remove any older one. Right-click on the patch shows up
the “Uninstall” menu.

1. Click on “Install new patch(s)” button.

2. Click on “Add files” button to select the patch then click “Ok”.
3. The patching process starts and the installation progress is shown in Messages table.
4. Once patching is done, you get access to the Read me file and Patch log.

209 February 6, 2020

 Client-DCM Software
Un-installing Client-DCM applications suite > Installing Client-DCM application suite 6

Un-installing Client-DCM applications suite

If, for any reason, you need to un-install the Client-DCM applications software, use the
following procedure:
1. Login as “userdcm” (standalone client station) or “user508” (co-hosted client
station).
2. Close all DCM windows.
3. On a Linux client, go to Applications > Sercel > Uninstall.
(On a Windows host, select Programs > Client-DCM > un-install from the Start
menu.)
4. This opens the un-install wizard for the Client-DCM.
5. Follow the un-installer utility instructions on screen to proceed with the un-
installation.
6. Reboot the computer.

210
Chapter

7 Peripherals

In this chapter:

• LCD Screen Management (page 212)

• Printer (page 213)
• NAS Storage Systems (page 214)
• Tablet Computer (page 265)
• Handheld Computer (page 266)

508XT Installation Manual 211

 Peripherals
LCD Screen Management > Server-508 7

LCD Screen Management

Server-508

HP ProLiant DL380p Gen8 Server

Even if the server is not delivered with a screen, it may be necessary to collect some
information directly on the Machine.
The Server-508 uses a VGA socket on the rear panel.
The screen definition will be by Default.

Client-508

HP Z420 or HP Z440
The Client Machine runs with a NVIDIA QUADRO K2200 and 2 displayPort adaptors.
The Client Machine is able to manage up to 4 LCD screens.
In case of re-install of the Client Machine, download the adequate NVIDIA driver for
Quadro K2200 under Windows 7 from dedicated internet site.

Windows 7 Operating System

The Driver for NVIDIA board is installed before shipment.
In case of re-install of the Client Machine, download the adequate NVIDIA driver for
Quadro K22000 under Windows 7 from dedicated internet site.
To use the Multi-Screen management, refers to “Screen resolution” function accessible
through a right-click under on the Desktop.

Red Hat 6.3 Workstation Operating System

The Client Machine is not currently compatible with this Operating System.

Z4G4
In case of 4 LCD Scren connections using NEC Multiscan - EA271Q and a client PC Z4G4
running Windows 10, some information is required to complete the installation.
The 4 LCD screens are detected by Windows 10 but they are not positioned correctly
(regardless of the port selected in the P1000 board).
The application NVDIA Control Panel must be run to correctly position the LCD screens:
1. Go to Display -> Set up multiple displays.

212
Peripherals
Printer > Client-508

2. Enter the order of the LCD screens (from left to right). Ensure to select the left most
screen as the primary screen.

3. Proceed to the instructions for installing the Client-508 software. See Client-508
Software installation on HP Z4 G4 (page 140)

Printer
A standard colour printer allows automatic printouts of observer’s reports, or log from any
operation, or snapshots.
The Printer is connected to the client machine.

213 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

NAS Storage Systems

In this section:
• NAS XXXXX (page 214)
• NAS TOWER X TB (page 241)
• NAS RACK 96TB (page 256)
• Working with NAS (page 260)

NAS XXXXX

NAS4000
The NAS4000 is a storage unit intended for use with the NFS export mode of the seismic
acquisition system. The real-time record capacity of the NAS4000 is 50 000 channels @ 
2-ms sample rate.
The NAS4000 enclosure has a pair of removable disks (DiskRacks) configured for RAID
0+1 recording, which combines the main advantages of both RAID 0 (fast data transfer
achieved by stripping) and RAID 1 (fault tolerance and reliability achieved by mirroring).
The data is stripped across several disks in one DiskRack, and each disk has a partner disk
in the other DiskRack with exactly the same data on it.

214
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Figure 7-1 NAS4000

Item Description Item Description

1 Power ON/OFF button 8 RS232
LED Diagnostic (boot, mount,
2 9 Eth.1 , Eth.2 connectors – 1 Gbps
failure)
3 LCD Display 10 USB 2.0 connectors
Eth.3, Eth.4 connectors (option) – 1
4 Key pad (navigation menu) 11
Gbps
5 DiskRack #1 – 2 TB 12 Power Supply
6 DiskRack #2 – 2 TB 13 Power Supply Main switch
7 VGA Connector

215 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Machine Configuration
Hard NAS 4000
µP Intel I3-4330
OS Square OS
HD 2 DiskRack of 2 TB
RAM 8 GB

NAS Performance
Export Throughput 100MB/s on Eth. 1GB
Channel Capacity for Export Real Time 50 k Channels @ 2ms
Memory Capacity 4 TB in RAID10 – 2 TB usable

Specifications
NAS Housing 223 (H) × 174 (W) × 451 (D)
NAS Weight 9, 000 kg (with 2 DiskRack inserted) – 5,000 Kg empty
NAS DiskRack Size: 105 (H) × 82 (W) × 189 (D)
NAS DiskRack Weight 2.055 kg

Sercel Parts
NAS4000 (with 2 diskRacks) 10000973
DiskRack 2 TB 317090424A
Shock-mount assembly 756089953A
Rack-mount Assembly 756090006A
Transportation container 10000426

216
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

NAS12000H
The NAS12000H is a high-throughput storage unit intended for use with the NFS export
mode of the seismic acquisition system. The real-time record capacity of the NAS12000H is
150 000 channels @ 2-ms sample rate.
With a similar design as the current NAS4000, these new devices has two removable bays
called “DiskRacks”. The same data is stored in each DiskRack ensuring the redundancy in
two different supports.

Figure 7-2 NAS12000H

Item Description Item Description

1 Power ON/OFF button 8 RS232
LED Diagnostic (boot, mount,
2 9 Eth.1, Eth.2 connectors – 1 Gbps
failure)
3 LCD Display 10 USB 2.0 connectors
Eth.3, Eth.4 connectors (option) – 1
4 Key pad (navigation menu) 11
Gbps
5 DiskRack #1 – 2 TB 12 Power Supply
6 DiskRack #2 – 2 TB 13 Power Supply Main switch
7 VGA Connector

217 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Machine Configuration
Hard NAS 12000H
µP Intel I3-4330
OS Square OS
HD 2 DiskRack of 2 TB
RAM 8 GB

NAS Performance
Export Throughput 300 MB/s on Eth. 10GB
Channel Capacity for Export Real Time 150 k Channels @ 2 ms
Memory Capacity 12 TB in RAID10 – 6 TB usable

Specifications
NAS Housing 223 (H) × 174 (W) × 451 (D)
NAS Weight 12, 000 kg (with 2 DiskRack inserted) – 5,000 Kg empty
NAS DiskRack Size: 105 (H) × 82 (W) × 189 (D)
NAS DiskRack Weight 3, 500 kg

Sercel Parts
NAS12000H (with 2 diskRacks) 10018185
DiskRack 6 TB 10019352
Shock-mount assembly 756089953A
Rack-mount Assembly 756090006A
Transportation container 10000426
10 Gb Ethernet Land kit (for 508XT) 10019353

218
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Field use
For standard configurations, we recommend the below quantity to run the flow:
• 2 NAS (1 located in the recorder & 1 located at QC department)
• 8 DiskRacks
• 5 DiskRack Transport Container
Note High data rate performance of NAS12000H is reached thanks to an additional
10Gb/s Ethernet card proposed separately, must be installed on the 508XT server
to reach the performance.

Cabling
Profiles Configuration
NAS 4000 NAS 12000H

Figure 7-3 NAS Profiles Configuration

Item Description Item Description

1 Eth 0 - 1 Gbps 5 Eth 0 - 1 Gbps
2 Eth 1 - 1 Gbps 6 Eth 1- 1 Gbps
3 Eth 2 - 1 Gbps (Option) 7 Eth 2 - 10 Gbps
4 Eth 3 - 1 Gbps (Option) 8 Eth 3 - 10 Gbps

219 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Example of Configuration

Example 1
Standard crew (Connected Field Boxes, no Autonomous Area) with a production of a SEGD
file of 100 MB every 6 s.
Ethernet 1 Gb is enough to transfert in real Time the seismic Data.
Choose the Profile REC_NAS#3 to dedicate the 4th Ethernet interface on the SERVER-508
to Export data.

220
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Example 2
Mega crew (Connected Field Boxes, no Autonomous Area) with a High productivity of a
SEGD file of 400 MB every 2 - 3 s.
Ethernet 10 Gb is requested to transfer in real Time the seismic Data.
Choose the Profile REC_NAS#5 to dedicate the 1st 10 Gb Ethernet interface on the
SERVER-508 to Export data.

221 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Power ON /OFF and Replace DiskRack

Connect the 220V power cord on the NAS XXXXX
To Power ON the NAS XXXXX, turn On the power switch on the Back panel of the NAS.
This button can be let in the ON position.
Then:
• Push the Power ON/OFF Button on the Front Panel
• If DiskRack are not inserted, the Start sequence will stop after the boot of the NAS
XXXXX. See message on the Display, it must indicate that no DiskRack has been found)
• If DiskRack are present, after the boot sequence, the system mount automatically the
DiskRack. See message on the display, it must indicate that NAS is ready to be attached
to an acquisition system.

To power OFF the NAS XXXXX, push on the Power ON/OFF button on the Front Panel:
• The NAS system will automatically unmount the DiskRack.
• The NAS can be stopped even if there are no DiskRack inserted
During a swap sequence of DiskRack (for instance, replacement of DiskRack), you have to :
• Choose “unmount” on the Export View by right click on the NAS device.
• Then, choose on the NAS the function unmount by using the keys on front panel and the
information s on the display)

222
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

• Wait for end of DiskRack unmount. (the display informs you when you can extract the
DiskRack.
• Extract the DisRack and replace them
• Perform a “mount” sequence manually on the NAS to let it to recognize the new
DiskRack
• When the NAS is ready, right click on Device in Export view to mount the NAS on
508XT system.

223 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Display panel
Status:
Storage:
Raid (See General
Hdd:
Rack: status (page 225)

OK OK

Back
DiskRacks
Profiles
Information
OK

Information Profiles

DiskRack Back
OS Version: Profile: xxx
Status Change
Release Information
Date:
mm/dd/yyyy OK

OK
(See Information Information Change
menu (page 225)
Back Name Back
Mount Status: Profile 1
Unmount Link Profile 2
Information IP Profile 3
OK OK
(See Profiles
menu
(page 226)

Apply
Profile?
Information Mount Unmount No
Yes
Left OK
DiskRack
Status Mount Unmount
Right DiskRacks? DiskRacks?
DiskRack No Yes No Yes
Status
OK OK OK
(See DiskRacks menu
(page 226)

Figure 7-4 Quick guide

224
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

General status

Topic Detail Description

General status of the NAS4000 / NAS12000H
mounted RW Two DiskRacks mounted, Read/Write allowed.
One DiskRack mounted, or two DisRacks mounted but each with
mounted RO
Status different content.
free No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted.
rebuild RW Two DiskRacks mounted, and Verify RAID function launched.
1/100 : 160.8 min Remaining time to complete checking.
Status of DiskRacks
RW Standard Read/Write mode.
Storage RO One DiskRack inserted. Read-Only mode.
RW locked Export activated.
none No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted.
RAID status
Operationnal for Export (two DiskRacks mounted, synchronized) or
ready
Raid operational for Read (one DiskRack mounted).
free No DiskRack, or DiskRack unmounted.
rebuildabl Two DiskRacks mounted, but RAID needs rebuilding.
Hard disk global status
4/4 Standard. All Hard Disks are operational for Export.
Hdd
2/4 One DiskRack mounted for RO mode.
0/4 DiskRack unmounted or not inserted.
Global status DiskRack insertion
2/2 Standard. All DiskRacks are operational for Export.
Rack
1/2 One DiskRack mounted for RO mode.
0/2 DiskRack unmounted or not inserted.

Information menu
• OS Version: Operating System version.
• Release Date: MM/DD/YYYY.
• Install Date: MM/DD/YYYY.
• Current mode: “Production” or “Factory”.

225 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Profiles menu
• Profile: profile used.
• Change: used to select the profile to use.
• Information:
- Name: port identification (eth0, eth1, eth2, eth3).
- Status: “Up” if active, “Down” if inactive.
- Link: “Present” if connected to a network, “None” if not connected to any
network.
- IP: IP address of this port.

DiskRacks menu
• Mount: used to mount DiskRacks.
• Unmount: used to unmount DiskRacks.
• Information:
- Left DiskRack: “OK” or “Missing”.
- Right DiskRack: “OK” or “Missing”.
- Global Raid: “OK” (RW mode) or “Readable” (RO mode).
- Usage: “xxGB / 2 TB” where xx stands for the used space, and 2 TB is the capacity
of a DiskRack.

226
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Web interface
On shipment from Sercel the NAS4000/NAS12000H has a default configuration that allows
you to open its Web interface as follows:
1. Connect the Eth1 port of the NAS4000 enclosure to the Ethernet port of a PC.
2. In a Web browser window on the PC, type the IP address of the NAS4000
(172.27.128.41) into the address field.
3. In the Welcome window, type the user name (qc or observer) and password
(usernas).

Figure 7-5

4. Click Submit. This opens the status page showing the RAID status and the used disk
space.

User name
Three user names are available for logging in:
• observer (password “usernas”): does not allow you to erase SEG-D files from the disks,
but lets you use all other menus;
• qc (password “usernas”): lets you use all available menus. Also allows you to load
software updates.
• root (password “administrator”): same as “qc” with “Errors Code” tab for technical
support.

IP address
If changes have been made to the default configuration and you do not remember the IP
address, you can read it on the LCD display of the NAS4000 enclosure by selecting the
Profiles > Information menu with the front panel keypad.

227 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Status menu

Figure 7-6 Status page

Clicking on Details brings up a detailed status page.

228
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Figure 7-7 Detailed Status

Clicking on Logs brings up a page showing the history of messages generated by the system.

229 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Figure 7-8 Message log page

Disk management menu

• Mount: attaches the DiskRacks to the file system of the NAS4000. If the RAID status is
incorrect, the disks are mounted in “read only” mode.

Figure 7-9

• Unmount: separates the DiskRacks from the file system of the NAS4000. If recording is
in progress, first click on Unmount in the Export view of the 508XT HCI to separate the
NAS4000 from the server’s file system.
• Verify: checks the RAID status of the DiskRacks. You can use this command while
recording is in progress.
• Erase: only available if you are logged in as “qc” or “root”. This will erase all SEGD files
from the mounted DiskRacks but preserve the RAID architecture. Prior to using this
command, make sure safe copies of the SEGD files have been made. Typically this
command is to be used after transferring the data to another storage system so that you
can reuse the same DiskRack pair to record new data.

230
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Choosing YES will erase all data from disks.

Be careful: this cannot be undone!
Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 7-10

• Destroy: only available if you are logged in as “qc” or “root”. This will erase all the
SEGD files from the mounted DiskRacks and also delete the RAID architecture, meaning
that you will not be able to reuse any of these DiskRacks unless and until you build a new
RAID pair by using the Create command (which takes a few hours). Prior to using the
Destroy command, make sure safe copies of the SEGD files have been made.

Choosing YES will erase all your SEGD files as well as the RAID
architecture. Be careful: this cannot be undone!
Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 7-11

• Create: this command allows configuring two DiskRacks so that they can be used as a
pair with a RAID architecture. Prior to launching this command, you must insert the two
DiskRacks into the NAS4000 enclosure and mount them. Typically you have to use this
command to build the RAID architecture after using the Destroy command, or if you
want to build DiskRacks from different pairs into a new pair. This process takes a few
hours. Writing to the disks is still allowed but at a slower rate.

231 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Choosing YES will create a new DiskRack pair and build the RAID
architecture. Recording is still allowed during this process, but at a
slower rate!
Tick to confirm your choice.

Figure 7-12

Profile management
The NAS4000 comes with a number of preset “profiles” (default configurations for its four
Ethernet ports). The Profile Management menu allows you to:
• Select a profile: used to choose a port configuration from the available dropdown list.

508XT

Figure 7-13

• Edit a profile: used to view the detailed settings of each port configuration.

232
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

508XT

508XT

Figure 7-14

If you want to make changes to a port configuration, click on the Modify icon.

233 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

508XT

Figure 7-15

• Add a profile: used to create your own Ethernet port configurations. You may want to
use this menu to assign different IP addresses to the Ethernet ports, so that you can then
quickly attach the NAS4000 to a different network (for example at a base camp) by
simply selecting the appropriate “Profile” whenever necessary. For each port you can
specify the IP address and netmask, and a gateway address if required.

234
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Error codes
If you are logged in as root user (the required password is administrator), an “Errors code”
tab is available. This allows you to find the description of any error code that may appear on
the front panel display in the event of an error or malfunction.

Figure 7-16

Installing the Operating System software or a patch

The Operating System is stored on two Disk On Module (DOM) chips and can be updated
direct from a USB stick.
• One DOM (Factory) contains a rescue release (initial software and updates) that can be
used if the Operating System needs to be reinstalled or updated.
• The other DOM (Production) contains the Operating System normally used at power-on
as the NASxxxxx boots up.
To load a software update:
1. Log in with “qc” as user name (password “usernas”).
2. Click Update.

235 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Figure 7-17

3. Click Browse and select the file to load.

4. Click Apply. This installs the software patch on both the Factory DOM and the
Production DOM. When the NASxxxxx is next booted up, it will automatically use
the updated OS from the Production DOM.
To reinstall the OS software, with or without updates, you only need to have the NAS4000
boot up on the Factory DOM rather than the Production DOM. To do that:
1. Connect a display screen and keyboard to the NASxxxxx (see Figure 7-1 on
page 215). Note that in order to select the desired options or menus in the
procedure below you must use that keyboard (move with up/down/left/right arrow
keys, select with the space bar).
2. Power on the NASxxxxx. Wait for two boot options to be prompted on the screen:
- Production (default boot option).
- Factory.
3. Choose Factory (within 3 seconds). The following menu appears:
- Installation
- Live
4. Choose Installation. This copies the initial OS from the Factory DOM to the
Production DOM. The following message should appear on the display panel:
Sercel Nas
Copying file
and on the external screen:
-------------- Installation -----------------------
Are you sure to install SquareOS X.X
You are going to format the system !
<YES> <NO>
5. Choose YES.

236
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

--------------------- Copy -------------------------

Copying…
...
Waiting for data syncing on DOM
6. Then the system prompts you to install the patches available from the Factory DOM:
-------------upgrade Installation-------------
If you want to install a backuped upgrade
Please select it in the list
(X) tess_upgrade_X.X.2
( ) tess_upgrade_X.X.1

<OK> <CANCEL>
- If you do not want to install any patch, choose Cancel. After rebooting
automatically, the NAS will boot on the “Production” DOM with the new OS
(with no patch, for example 1.0.0).
- If you want to install a patch, use the up or down arrow key to move to that patch,
and press the space bar to select it, then choose OK. As a result the patch is copied
to the “Production” DOM. After rebooting automatically, the NAS will boot on
the “Production” DOM with the updated OS (for example 1.0.1).
-------------upgrade Installation-------------
The upgrade installation applied
successfully
<OK>
-------------------finished------------------------
The installation is finished
The system will reboot
<OK>
------------------------------------------------------
Note that after installing the OS, you have to select which “Profile” to use. You can choose
one of the default profiles (for example “REC_NAS#1”) if appropriate, or use the web
interface to create a specific profile.

237 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

DiskRack Transport Container

To transport the DiskRacks in safe conditions, a specific container has been developed. With
a capacity of 2 DiskRacks, this transport container protects against shocks, water and dust.

Figure 7-18 DiskRack Transport Container

Item Description Item Description

1 Position DiskRack #1 3 Lock indicator
2 Position DiskRack #2

Specifications
Container Size 377 (H) x 275 (W) x 364 (D)
Container Weight 5,000 Kg Empty – 9,000 Kg with DR 2 TB
Protection Type IP65
Number of NAS Capacity 2

238
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX

Shock Mount kits

Rack-mount parts
A rack-mount option is available that allows installing two NAS XXXXX units side by side
in a 19" cabinet.

Figure 7-19 Rack mount option

239 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS XXXXX 7

Shock-mount parts
A shock absorber dedicated for the NAS XXXXX is available in case of no usable Rack 19”
in the Recorder.
The lower mount Plate is fixed on the Table.

Figure 7-20 NAS XXXXX shock absorber

285
4 mounting holes
(dia. 7)

265
495
515

(Dimensions in mm)

Figure 7-21 Lower mount plate

240
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

NAS TOWER X TB

NAS TOWER 4 TB or NAS TOWER 16 TB

The NAS TOWER X TB is a high-throughput storage units intended for use with the NFS
export mode of the seismic acquisition system. The real-time record capacity of the NAS
TOWER X TB is 150 000 channels @ 2 ms sample rate.
The Architecture of the NAS is composed of a Housing which embeds mother board, power
supply, display, and Extractable Disk.
That last allows Sercel to propose 2 configurations of Memory capacity:
• NAS TOWER 4 TB
• NAS TOWER 16 TB

Item Description Item Description

1 Power ON/OFF button 8 USB 3.0 connectors
2 LED Diagnostic (boot, mount, failure) 9 Eth. 1-4 connectors - 1 Gbps
3 LCD Display 10 Eth. 5-6 connectors SFP+- 10 Gbps
4 Key pad (navigation menu) 11 Power supply
5 Extractable Bay (1 TB/HDD or 4 TB/HDD)
6 Opt. USB connector for backup function
7 HDMI connectors
Note The additional Ethernet Card is initially with a single port and has been upgraded
to a dual port.

241 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Machine Configuration
Hard NAS TOWER 4 TB or NAS TOWER 16 TB
µP Quad Core AMD 2.1 GHz R-Series RX-421BD
OS Linux Kernel 2.6 or higher
HD 4 SATA 7200 RPM 6 Gb 3"5 Capacity 1 TB or 4 TB
RAM 4 GB

NAS Performance
Export Throughput 300 MB/s on Eth. 10 Gb
Channel Capacity for Export Real Time 150 k Channels @ 2 ms
Memory Capacity NAS TOWER 4 TB 4 TB in RAID5 – 3 TB usable
Memory Capacity NAS TOWER 16 TB 16 TB in RAID5 – 12 TB usable

Specifications
NAS Housing 188(H) × 199 (W) × 279 (D)
NAS Weight 7, 500 kg (with 4 HDD inserted) – 4, 900 Kg empty
Extractable Disk size 105 (H) × 82 (W) × 189 (D)
Extractable Disk weight 0,650 kg
Temperature Range 0-40°C
Humidity 5-95% Relative Humidity non condensing

Sercel Parts
NAS TOWER 4 TB 10040872
NAS TOWER 16 TB 10040943
Hard Disk Drive 1 TB 10040873
Hard Disk Drive 4 TB 10041183
NAS Assembly 1661083565C
NAS TOWER - Transportation container 10041255

242
 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

Cabling
Profiles Configuration

Figure 7-22 NAS TOWER X TB

Item Description
1 Eth 1 - 1 Gbps
2 Eth 2 - 1 Gbps
3 Eth 3- 1 Gbps
4 Eth 4 - 1 Gbps
5 Eth 5 - 10 Gbps
6 Eth 6 - 10 Gbps (if dual port 10 Gb)

Table 7-1 NAS Tower Configuration

Firm
NAS Type
Ware
Configuration eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 eth5 eth6
NAS-TOWER-1.rev1.bin 172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.127.42 no
v4.4.1
NAS or prior
NAS-TOWER-2.rev1.bin 172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.126.43 no
TOWER X
NAS-TOWER.rev2.bin 172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.127.43 172.27.126.44
TB
v4.4.1 NAS-
or later TOWER.FW4.4.1.bin
172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.127.43 172.27.126.44

243 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Note Initially .bin files were available directly under the Server-508 (specific
Directory /home/Sercel/com508/2.0/Server/Nas-Rack and Nas-Tower). 

From the version of the NAS firmware equal and above v4.4.1, the files for a
complete configuration of the NAS after a factory Reset are available under ftp
Sercel site /tools/NAS-TOWER-RACK- Config File. 

To know the Firmware version of the NAS, connect from a browser on the server
to the IP address of the NAS (ie : 172.27.126.44) enter login (admin) and
password (admin or admin508), then double click in Control Panel. 
For example:

Figure 7-23 FirmWare Version example

Example of configuration

Example 1
Standard crew (Connected Field Boxes, no Autonomous Area) with a production of a SEGD
file of 100 MB every 6 s.
Ethernet 1 Gb is enough to transfer in real Time the seismic Data. The system allows you to
use the dedicated Ethernet Interface on the SERVER-508

244
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

By Default the NAS is delivered with the configuration NAS-TOWER-1.bin.

Figure 7-24 Example 1

Example 2
Mega crew (Connected Field Boxes, no Autonomous Area) with a High productivity of a
SEGD file of 400 MB every 2-3s.
Ethernet 10Gb is requested to transfer in real Time the seismic Data.
By Default the NAS is delivered with the configuration NAS-TOWER-1.bin. A second file
is available to configure automatically the ETH5 of the NAS with the IP address
172.27.126.43. This setting is also accessible through the web interface of the NAS.

245 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Figure 7-25 Example 2

In case of NAS with Dual Port 10 Gb, the configuration is as follows:

Figure 7-26 10 Gb configuration Example

246
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

Power ON /OFF and Replace NAS

Connect the 220V power cord on the NAS POWER X TB
You have to follow this sequence each time it needs to replace the NAS.
Then :
• Push the Power ON/OFF Button on the Front Panel
• Let the NAS booting. (few minutes)
• At the end of the Boot, on the Display, you are able to check which Athernet Interface is
connected with corresponding IP address.

To power OFF the NAS POWER X TB, push on the Power ON/OFF button on the Front
Panel (short press):
• The NAS system will automatically shutdown.after the
• Disconnect carefully the SFP+ link
• Disconnect the Power cord.
• The NAS can be replaced.

247 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Web Interface
Connection
You may have to perform some setting directly on the NAS TOWER.
By default the NAS TOWER is configured by Sercel. In that Case, you have to connect the
NAS to a PC with a web browser and use on of the defined IP address to reach the NAS.
Example :
PC CLIENT-508 @172.27.128.2/24
NAS TOWER 4 TB with Eth3 @ 172.27.128.41/24

In the web browser of the PC CLIENT, type 172.27.128.41 in the http window :

Login / logout
Use the login with the username admin and the password admin to log you on the NAS
TOWER
Note Form version 4.4.1 or later, the default password is admin508

To logout /restart / shutdown:

• Select admin on the upper panel

248
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

• Choose the option needed

Home Window
After login identification, the Home Window allows you to navigate in the menus offered by
the NAS TOWER X TB

249 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Control Panel

250
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

Restore system setting

The NAS TOWER is preconfigured by Sercel, but for any reason you may need to reload the
configuration file:
• Select system/Backup/Restore
• Browse the file NAS-TOWER-1.bin file or NAS-TOWER-2.bin file initially delivered
on the SERVER-508.
• The System re-install all the parameters. And will need to reboot at the end of the
sequence.
Caution : The IP addresses of Ethernet interface may have changed.

251 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

Adjust Time and NTP server

The NAS TOWER is not preconfigured for time and TimeZone.
To adjust it according the local area:
• Select system/General Settings/Time
• Adjust the local time and the TimeZone.
• Check the NTP server IP Address. By default that last is corresponding to 172.27.127.1
(SERVER-508). You may have to change it if the IP address plan is 172.27.128.x.

252
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

Network IP address
For any reason you may have to adjust the IP Adress of 1 ethernet interface:
• Select Network & File Services/Network & Virtual Switch
• Select the interface to be modified.
• Apply your changes.

253 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB 7

NAS TOWER X TB Transport Container

To transport the NAS TOWER X TB in safety conditions, a specific container has been
developed. With a capacity of 1 NAS TOWER, this transport container is protecting against
shocks, water and dust.

Figure 7-27 NAS Transport Container

Item Description

1 Transport Container
2 NAS TOWER X TB

Specifications

Container Size 53,8 (H) x 40,6 (W) x 26,9 (D)

Container Weight 6,340 Kg Empty – 14,230 Kg with 1 NAS TOWER X TB
Protection Type IP65
Number of NAS Capacity 1

254
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS TOWER X TB

Shock Mount kits

Rack-mount parts
A rack-mount option should be available soon. To be inserted in the 508XT Rack 19".

Shock-mount parts
A shock absorber dedicated for the NAS TOWER X TB is available in case of no usable
Rack 19” in the Recorder.
The lower mount Plate is fixed on the Table.

Item Description Item Description

1 NAS TOWER X TB 3 Upper mount plate

2 Shock mount 4 Lower mount plate

255 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS RACK 96TB 7

NAS RACK 96TB

The NAS RACK 96TB (ref. 10043333) is a back-up storage device for the 508XT. It is
highly recommended to duplicate the production data in particular to ensure the data safety
during transfer from recorder to the QC.
Designed to stay permanently in the recorder, NAS RACK 96TB stores all the SEGD files
produced as backup for several days.
NAS RACK is complementary to NAS TOWER dedicated for the transportation between
recorder and base camp.
Designed for megacrew surveys (>60,000 channels), its memory capacity allows a storage
of several days of production.
The diagram below shows a typical configuration of DCM co-localized with 508.

Figure 7-28 NAS RACK 96TB (front & rear)

256
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS RACK 96TB

Item Description Item Description

1 Power ON/OFF button 5 USB 2.0 connectors
2 LED Diagnostic (boot, mount, failure) 6 Eth. 1-4 connectors - 1 Gbps
3 Extractable Bay (12 TB/HDD) 7 Eth. 5-6 connectors SFP+- 10 Gbps
4 USB 3.0 connectors 8 Power supply

NAS Performance
Export Throughput 300 MB/s on Eth. 10 Gb
Channel Capacity for Export Real Time 150 k Channels @ 2 ms
Memory Capacity NAS RACK 96 TB 96 TB in RAID5 – ~85 TB usable

Specifications
NAS Housing 2U rackmount - 89 x 482 x 534 mm
NAS Weight 9.850 kg
Extractable Disk size 101 (H) × 26 (W) × 147 (D)
Extractable Disk weight 0,705 kg
Temperature Range 0-40°C
Humidity 5-95% Relative Humidity non condensing

Sercel Parts
NAS RACK 96 TB 10043333

257 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS RACK 96TB 7

Cabling

Figure 7-29 NAS RACK 96TB

Item Description
1 Eth 1 - 1 Gbps
2 Eth 2 - 1 Gbps
3 Eth 3- 1 Gbps
4 Eth 4 - 1 Gbps
5 Eth 5 - 10 Gbps
6 Eth 6 - 10 Gbps

Table 7-2 NAS Rack Configuration

NAS
Type
FirmWare Configuration eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 eth5 eth6
v4.4.1 or
NAS prior
NAS-RACK.rev3.bin 172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.127.43 172.27.126.44
RACK
V4.4.1 or
96TB later
NAS-RACK.FW4.4.1.bin 172.27.127.41 172.27.127.42 172.27.128.41 DHCP 172.27.127.43 172.27.126.44

Note Initially .bin files were available directly under the Server-508 (specific
Directory /home/Sercel/com508/2.0/Server/Nas-Rack and Nas-Tower). 
From the version of the NAS firmware equal and above v4.4.1, the files for a
complete configuration of the NAS after a factory Reset are available under ftp
Sercel site /tools/NAS-TOWER-RACK- Config File. 

258
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > NAS RACK 96TB

To know the Firmware version of the NAS, connect from a browser on the server
to the IP address of the NAS (ie : 172.27.126.44) enter login (admin) and
password (admin or admin508), then double click in Control Panel. 
For example:

Figure 7-30 FirmWare Version example

Figure 7-31 Configuration example

259 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > Working with NAS 7

Working with NAS

Export to a NAS
The Media must be defined in the Setup/Export/Device and attached to a selection of filters
(see Setup/Export/Input Filters).

The protocol used to export Data is NFS. The IP address of the Media is requested and
depends of the profil definition (See the IP Address Table in this document)
The mounting point is request too and depends of type of NAS:

NAS Type Mounting Point

NAS XXXXX /mnt/raid

NAS TOWER X TB /public
Once the setup validated, the NAS Device must appear in the Production/Export perspective.

260
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > Working with NAS

On NAS, several actions are available by right clicking on the NAS icon :

The first action is the mounting sequence. That allows the user to activate the filters.
See chapter Production/Export/Perspective for more details about all possible actions)
If there are pending shots, they are automatically redirected to the Media.
If there’s no pending shots, the system wait for new SEGD. As soon as the system create a
new one, that last is automatically exported to the NAS in “Real Time”

261 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > Working with NAS 7

NAS Roll in the Field

Before physical disconnection, it’s mandatory to unmount the NAS (use the action by right
clicking on the NAS icon).
The roll of NAS or DiskRack is necessary in case of large volume of Data generated by the
system.
In such condition, it’s mandatory to keep in the Recorder a Storage Media as a backup for
the Seismic Data.

The PROD corresponds to the seismic Data created along the day by the “Recorder” This
data will be provided to the Quality Department on the crew.
The Backup is the copy of the PROD Data.
In the first case (NAS XXXXX) , the roll of MEDIA is the DiskRack.
In the second case (NAS TOWER xx TB), the roll of MEDIA is the NAS itself.

NAS Roll of NAS XXXXX

262
Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > Working with NAS

Procedure
1. On the HCI, Unmount the NAS drive (right click on th NAS Icon and choose
“unmount”)
2. On the front Panel of the NASXXXXX, select “unmount” action
3. Wait for end of the Sequence (see message on the Display)
4. Remove the 2 DiskRack.
• 1 stay in the Recorder
• 1 in the Transport Contenair (ready to go to QC Dpt)
5. Insert new 2 DiskRack
6. On the front Panel of the NASXXXXX, select “mount” action
7. Wait for end of the Sequence (see message on the Display)
8. On the HCI, “mount” the NAS Drive (right click on th NAS Icon and choose
“mount”)

NAS Roll of NAS TOWER X TB

Procedure
1. On the HCI, Unmount the NAS drive (right click on th NAS Icon and choose
“unmount”)
2. On the NAS TOWER X TB, power OFF the NAS (simply press on the power OFF
button on the Front panel)
3. Wait for end of stop sequence. (NAS TOWER x TB off)
4. On the back panel, remove the:
• Power cord
• Ethernet 10Gb connector (pay attention on this connector)
5. Replace the NAS TOWER x TB by a new one
6. Connect Power cord and Ethernet 10Gb interface
7. On the NAS TOWER X TB, power ON the NAS
8. Wait for end of boot sequence. (NAS TOWER x TB ON, message on the Display)
9. On the HCI, “mount” the NAS Drive (right click on th NAS Icon and choose
“mount”)

Attach NAS XXXXX to Windows System

Thanks to SAMBA protocole activated in the NAS, you may have possibilities to connect
directly the NAS on PC running under windows, and browse the files as a window directory.
That is useful for a simple copy of the SEGD file on a tier machine.

263 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
NAS Storage Systems > Working with NAS 7

Procedure
1. The NAS XXXXX is ready with DiskRack inserted and mounted.
2. On the Windows PC, verify you are able to ping the NAS XXXXX
3. In the Explorer window address field on the PC, type the IP address of the NAS (ie :
\\172.27.127.41)
4. At the login prompt type user : qc and password : usernas
5. As a result the /mnt/raid partition of the NAS XXXXX with a “segd” directory is
now visible on the PC.
6. Copy the complete patchname (ie : \\172.27.127.41\segd)
7. In the “Map Network Drive” (right click on “Computer”) paste the pathname into
the “Folder” field
8. As a result, the NAS XXXXX is now attached to the PC and seen as a network drive.

Example (Windows 7)

264
Peripherals
Tablet Computer > Working with NAS

Tablet Computer
The FT-508 field tester, is a software application (hosted on a Tablet PC) dedicated for
outdoor work to help troubleshooters, observers and customer support engineers to test the
Field Units deployed along the 508XT Line.
For more information see,
• Tablet Computer (page 73) in the chapter Hardware.
• Installing Client-508 Application Software (page 137)

Figure 7-32 Tablet PC

265 February 6, 2020

 Peripherals
Handheld Computer > Working with NAS 7

Handheld Computer
The DT-508 & IT-508 software applications run on a hand-held PDA (Motorola WorkAbout
Pro 4).
For more information see,
• Handheld Computer (page 72) in the chapter Hardware.
• Installing Client-508 Application Software (page 137)

Figure 7-33 Handheld Computer

266
Peripherals
Handheld Computer > Working with NAS

267 February 6, 2020

Chapter

8 Data Harvester WTU-508

In this chapter:

• Overview (page 270)

• Creating a bootable Ubuntu 14.04 LTS flash key
(page 271)
• Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet
(page 272)
• Installing the DCM Reaper application (page 282)
• Software Access Point Application (page 282)
• Installing DCM Field Monitor Application (page 282)

508XT Installation Manual 269

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Overview > Product Information 8

Overview
This chapter explains how to:
• Create a bootable flash key containing a Reaper-customized Ubuntu (Linux) operating
system from the materials delivered on the DCM USB installation key (ref.10040209).
• Install Ubuntu operating system on the harvester tablet.
• Install the DCM Reaper application on the harvester tablet.
Automatically installing a pre-configured Ubuntu operating system on the tablet from a flash
key greatly simplifies the installation process and provides the user with an easy way of
reinstalling the tablet from scratch whenever needed.
This procedure applies to harvester tablets xPlore C5 and C6.
Once the bootable flash key has been made, its content may be duplicated to other flash keys
as long as the media have at least the same capacity.
The following procedure must be run from a Windows machine.

Product Information

Product Operating
Function Part No. Range (m)
Reference System
Harvest data Tetra RT12 Ubuntu 14.04 10037628 80
from WTU-508 (Linux)

270
Data Harvester WTU-508
Creating a bootable Ubuntu 14.04 LTS flash key > Product Information

Creating a bootable Ubuntu 14.04 LTS flash key

Ubuntu 14.04 LTS is the Linux distribution used for data harvester installation.
1. Run the rufus application available on the DCM Ubuntu installation key
(ref.10040209) at tools/windows/rufus-2.18/rufus.exe.
2. In Rufus:
• Select the destination device (1). Select the drive corresponding to the destination
USB flash key: be careful to select the proper drive as the content of the selected
drive will be definitely wiped out!
• Browse to the dcm_2.0.0_ubuntu.iso file (2).
• Uncheck “Create extended label and icon files” (3).
• Press Start (4).

Figure 8-1 Rufus Installation Parameters

3. When the installation is complete, exit Rufus.

271 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information 8

Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet

The installation procedure is different depending on the tablet model:
• Installing Ubuntu on a 1-disk C5 (page 273)
• Installing Ubuntu on a 2-disk C5 (page 278)
• Installing Ubuntu on a 1-disk C6 (page 278)
• Installing Ubuntu on a Tetra RT12 (page 279)

Getting the “DH ID”

Before anything else, write down the DH ID written on the sticker located at the back of the
tablet, behind the battery pack (remove the battery pack).

DH ID

Figure 8-2

272
Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information

Checking the type of tablet

Note Ignore this step on a Tetra RT12.
The model type of your tablet is written on a sticker located at the back of it, behind the
battery pack as well. Remove the battery pack and sport the black sticker showing
information like xplore TECHNOLOGIES/Model No : iX104C5.

Checking the number of disks in your tablet

Note Ignore this step on a Tetra RT12
1. Plug in a keyboard to a USB port of the tablet.
2. Start up the machine.
3. At the early beginning of the boot sequence, hit “F2” to enter the BIOS.
4. The initial BIOS screen should be the “Information” tab.
5. If 2 disks are mounted in your tablet, there must be 2 entries HDDx in the
Information tab, each of them being identified with a serial number.
6. If there is only 1 disk, either only 1 HDD entry is visible or the 2nd entry shows a
serial number of “None”.
e.g.:
HDD1 Serial Number : XXX
HDD2 Serial Number : YYY
Or
HDD1 Serial Number : XXX
HDD2 Serial Number : None

7. Quit the BIOS without saving: Exit Discarding Changes

Installing Ubuntu on a 1-disk C5

1. The tablet must be off, shut it down if necessary.
2. Plug in a keyboard in one the USB ports of the tablet.
3. Plug in the flash key in another USB port.
4. Turn on the tablet.
5. When the following menu appears on screen, select your model of tablet (C5 1-disk)
and press “Enter”:

273 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information 8

Figure 8-3

6. When installation is over, you are invited to reboot the tablet. Click “Restart now”.
Note During installation, IF the following message appears:

 
Figure 8-4

• Shut Down the tablet and start up the machine

274
Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information

• At the early beginning of the boot sequence, hit “CTRL I” to enter the following screen:

Figure 8-5

• Select “Delete RAID Volume” (option 2)

Figure 8-6

275 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information 8

• Select the volume

Figure 8-7

• and hit DEL

Figure 8-8

276
Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information

• Confirm with “Y”.

• Exit with “Esc” and “Y”.
• Start again the installation (point #1).
7. On black screen, remove the flash key from the tablet.

277 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information 8

Installing Ubuntu on a 2-disk C5

1. The tablet must be off, shut it down if necessary.
2. Plug in the flash key in a USB port of the tablet.
3. Turn on the tablet.
4. When the following menu appears on screen, just wait.

Figure 8-9

5. When the installation is over, you are invited to reboot the tablet. Click “Restart
now”.
Note If you cannot proceed with the installation and, instead have an error message
‘No root file system is defined’, please refer to C5 1 disk install procedure
above. See Figure 8-4 (page 274).
6. On black screen, remove the flash key from the tablet.

Installing Ubuntu on a 1-disk C6

1. The tablet must be off, shut it down if necessary.
2. Plug in a keyboard in one the USB ports of the tablet.
3. Plug in the flash key in another USB port of the tablet.
4. Turn on the tablet and press “F12” to open the boot menu.
5. Select “USB HDD” and press enter.
6. When the following menu appears on screen, press “Enter”:

Figure 8-10

278
Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information

7. When the installation is over, you are invited to reboot the tablet. Click “Restart
now”.
8. Remove the flash key from the tablet.

Installing Ubuntu on a Tetra RT12

1. The tablet must be off, shut it down if necessary.
2. Plug in the DH DCM Ubuntu USB key in a USB port.
3. Refer to the Tetra RT12 shortcut keys (see Figure 8-11) to identify the Back key on
the right of the tablet’s display.
4. Turn on the tablet and immediately press the Back key several times until the “Please
select boot device” menu appears.

5. Using the up and down arrow keys, select “UEFI: KingstonDataTraveler 3.0PMAP”
and press the Enter key.
6. Select “Install Ubuntu for DCM Harvester – C6 1 Disk” and press the Enter key.
7. When installation is over, you are invited to reboot the tablet. Click “Restart now”.

279 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information 8

Back

Up arrow

Enter

Down
arrow

Figure 8-11 Tetra RT12 shortcut keys

Configuring the Data Harvester

Network configuration
The network configuration of the data harvester is automatic.
However, since there can be several data harvesters on the field, each tablet must get
configured with a unique IP address.
The data harvester IP address is deduced from the DH ID of the tablet.
When restarting the tablet after installing Ubuntu, the following box appears:

280
Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the Ubuntu operating system on the tablet > Product Information

Type in the DH ID (see Getting the “DH ID” (page 272)) and press “OK”.

Figure 8-12

Calibration
Note Ignore this step on Tetra RT12
The first time the tablet is restarted after installation, a touch screen calibration tool is started.
Follow the on-screen instructions with your finger to calibrate the screen. This calibration
tool is designed to be used with the finger, not the stylus. The calibration tool can then be
launched if needed using the corresponding icon in the launch bar.

Troubleshooting
On a Tetra RT12, upon first start, SoftAP will report an error “AP did not start properly”.
Reboot the tablet and SoftAP will work properly.

281 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester WTU-508
Installing the DCM Reaper application > Product Information 8

Installing the DCM Reaper application

1. Plug in the DCM Ubuntu Installation USB key (ref. 10040209) to the Data Harvester
USB port.
2. Browse to the installer file dcm_2.0/field/DataHarvester/reaper and double-click on
it.
3. In the opening window, click “Install”.
4. If a password is asked, use “userdcm”.
5. In the license agreement dialog, check the box if you accept the license and press
OK. 
Note: The license agreement dialog may appear behind the main window. In this
case, you have to click on the corresponding icon in the launcher bar.
6. A Reaper launcher shortcut is available in the application launcher once the
installation is complete.

Installing DCM Field Monitor Application

1. Plug in the DCM Ubuntu installation key to the data harvester USB port.
2. Browse to the installer file in dcm_2.0/field/DataHarvester/monitor and double-click
on it.
3. In the opening window, click “Install”.
4. If a password is asked, use “userdcm”.
5. In the license agreement dialog, check the box if you accept the license and press
OK. 
Note: The license agreement dialog may appear behind the main window. In this
case, you have to click on the corresponding icon in the launcher bar.
6. A Field Monitor application launcher shortcut is available in the application
launcher once the installation is complete.

Software Access Point Application


The softAP application included with the installation allows you to configure the
essential Wi-Fi parameters of the access point.
A default standard configuration addressing most of the needs is set at installation though.

282
Chapter

9 PFT Software

This chapter describes how to update and re-install the PFT

software on a Workabout Pro 4 handheld device

• Overview (page 284)

• Exiting the PFT application (page 284)
• Connecting the Workabout Pro 4 to a Windows PC
(page 285)
• Reinstalling the Workabout Pro 4 (page 287)
• Workabout Pro 4 device settings (page 288)

508XT Installation Manual 283

 PFT Software
Overview > 9

Overview
This chapter describes how to re/install the PFT software on the Workabout Pro 4 handheld
device.
On the DCM RedHat installation USB key (ref. 10040199), in the dcm_2.0\field\PFT
directory, you will find the Sercel PFT software and drivers and other software used on the
handheld device, such as:
• Operating System image for the Workabout Pro 4
• Drivers for the Workabout Pro 4 RFID scanner.

Exiting the PFT application

The PFT application is designed to hide Windows Mobile to make it difficult for an untrained
operator to access the operating system, and change settings that may adversely affect the
operation of the device.
Unlike most applications there is no obvious way to exit the application. In order to stop the
application:
1. From the application's main screen tap the Inventory list… button.

Figure 9-1

2. Tap the keyboard icon at the bottom to pop-up the on-screen keyboard.
3. In the List name box type “pft quit” (include the space) and tap the Enter key.
4. The PFT application will exit revealing the Windows Mobile desktop.

284
PFT Software
Connecting the Workabout Pro 4 to a Windows PC > Prerequistes

Connecting the Workabout Pro 4 to a Windows PC

In this section:
• Prerequistes (page 285)
• Installation Procedure (page 285)
• Connect the Workabout Pro 4 device with docking cradle (page 286)
• Reinstalling the Workabout Pro 4 (page 287)

Prerequistes
• A laptop/desktop PC running Windows
• The docking cradle with USB cable to connect the Workabout Pro 4 to the PC
• A USB drive

Installation Procedure
Download Windows Mobile Device Center Installer:
• Version 32 bits (Windows XP): 
https://www.microsoft.com/fr-fr/download/details.aspx?id=14
• Version 64 bits (Windows Vista and Windows 7):
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download details.aspx?id=3182
• Double-click the installer and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the
installation.

285 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Connecting the Workabout Pro 4 to a Windows PC > Connect the Workabout Pro 4 device with docking 9
cradle

Connect the Workabout Pro 4 device with docking cradle

Connect the Workabout Pro 4 device to the computer using the docking cradle.
Once connected, it is possible to access the content of the Workabout Pro 4 device through
Windows Explorer:

Figure 9-2

It is now possible to browse the Workabout Pro 4 device’s file system, similar to that of a
USB drive. This is useful for transferring files to and from the device.

286
PFT Software
Reinstalling the Workabout Pro 4 > Reinstalling Windows Mobile

Reinstalling the Workabout Pro 4

This section describes how to reinstall everything on the Workabout Pro 4 device. Everything
from the operating system to the Sercel software will need to be reinstalled.
Note Reinstalling the operating system resets the device to its factory settings. Make
sure any field unit lists are transferred to the UCI (refer to section Transferring
Field Units list by USB Drive (page 303)) before reinstalling the device.
Make a backup copy of any other files that you wish to save. Backed-up files
must be copied off the Workabout Pro 4 to a USB drive or a Windows PC using
Windows Mobile Device Center.

Reinstalling Windows Mobile

The procedure to reinstall Windows Mobile is detailed in the document
<USBDrive>:/dcm_2.0/field/PFT/Docs/wap4-operating-system-weh6-5-v-3-4-
releasenotes.pdf.
Files for OS reinstallation can be found on the USB Installation Key 
<USBDrive>:/dcm_2.0/field/PFT/WindowsMobile/Device/:
• 7528os.img is the OS image (no need to rename it)
• P728XW65ENCB030400.cab is the add-on file to install after the OS has been
reinstalled.
After OS re-installation has completed, follow the procedure in section 4 to set-up the
Workabout Pro 4 device.

Clean Start
The following steps describe how to reset the Workabout Pro 4 device to its factory settings
without reinstalling the Windows Embedded Handheld Operating System. The procedure is
also described in the Workabout Pro 4 User Manual, delivered on the DCM USB Installation
key :\dcm_2.0\field\PFT\Docs (pages 1-4 and 1-5). Ensure you make a backup before
continuing.
• Press and hold buttons [Front Scan], [FN/BLUE], and [Power] for six seconds.
• At the boot menu: type .25326 (“.clean”) and press ENTER. The device restarts
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 with the factory settings.
• Proceed to complete re-installation of the Workabout Pro 4 device following instructions
from section 4.

287 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Changing Home settings 9

Workabout Pro 4 device settings

Changing Home settings
• Go to “Settings” page: tap the Windows button then “Settings”:

Figure 9-3

• Then tap on “Home” and “Items” in the top right corner. In the “Items” menu, uncheck
all the elements of the list and uncheck the “Home timeout” check box. Then tap on “OK”
button:

Figure 9-4

288
PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Setting date and time

Setting date and time

• From the “Settings” page, tap on “Clock and Alarms” then set the time according to your
timezone and date and time. When finished, click “OK” button and “Yes” when prompted
to save changes:

Figure 9-5

Disable Error Reporting

• From the “Settings” page, tap on “System” then “Error reporting”. Go down with the
scroll bar then check “Disable error reporting” and tap “OK” to confirm:

Figure 9-6

289 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking 9

Configuring Wireless Networking

• Turn the AP on.
• Remove the Workabout Pro 4 from the cradle dock.
• Go to the “Settings” page.Then tap on “Wireless Companion”:

Figure 9-7

290
PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking

• Tap on “Wireless Configuration Editor” then “Find WLANs”. When a list of networks
appears, double-tap on the network you want to connect to and tap “Create profile”:

Figure 9-8

According to the AP configuration, the creation of the profile may differ. When a key is
required, enter the encryption key of the AP to connect to.
Go to the chapter matching your AP configuration and follow the screen captures. In all
cases, IP address and subnet mask must be set as follows:
• The PFT’s IP address is based on the PFT ID number shown on the label on the back of
the device.
• All PFT’s must have an IP address in the range 10.3.xx.xx where xx is a number from 0
to 255 and xx.xx is the PFT ID as a 16-bit value.
• If the PFT ID is less than 255 then the IP address is 10.3.0.<ID>.
• For example PFT-9 will have the IP address 10.3.0.9.

291 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking 9

• If the PFT ID is greater than 255 then the IP address is calculated as follows…
• The first two components are always 10.3
• The third component is the ID / 256 rounded down to an integer
value.
• The fourth component is the ID – (third_component * 256)
• For example, PFT-1145 will have the IP address 10.3.4.121.
• The Subnet mask must be set to 255.0.0.0.

AP with no encryption

Figure 9-9 Procedure for AP with no Encryption

292
PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking

AP with WEP64 encryption

Figure 9-10 Procedure for AP with WEP64 Encryption

293 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking 9

AP with WPA2 encryption

Figure 9-11 Procedure for AP with WPA2 Encryption

294
PFT Software
Workabout Pro 4 device settings > Configuring Wireless Networking

Once profile is configured:

• Then tap on “OK” twice to exit the wireless companion application:

Figure 9-12

• To check that wireless configuration is properly set, go to the “Settings” page and tap on
“Connections” then “Wireless Manager”. Enable the Wi-Fi if it is not activated. If the AP
is properly set, the name of your network should appear:

Figure 9-13

• Quit the wireless manager by tapping on .

295 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Installing RFID driver on the Workabout Pro 4 9

Installing DCM PFT software

Installing RFID driver on the Workabout Pro 4

Installation procedure
• Copy CAB files to a USB drive: on a Windows PC, copy the contents of the
WindowsMobile folder from the DCM RedHat USB installation key (ref. 10040199)
(<USBdrive>:\dcm_2.0\field\PFT\WindowsMobile) to a USB drive.
• Connect the USB drive to the Workabout Pro 4 using the docking cradle.
• Locate (in WindowsMobile/Device) and double tap on the file
pwruxw65xxcb020000.cab to start installation. Then choose “Device” and tap on
“Install”. The Workabout Pro 4 will restart automatically after installation of RFID
drivers is finished:

Figure 9-14

296
PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Installing RFID driver on the Workabout Pro 4

• On restart, the user is requested to set the region of the operation. Tap “ok” then select
the region:

Figure 9-15

• Finally, confirm the choice and tap “OK” again to finalize installation of RFID drivers.

RFID configuration
The RFID configuration is available when tapping the small icon in the bottom right corner
of the Windows desktop:

Figure 9-16

297 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Install PFT application 9

• “Configure Performance” allows to choose between autonomy and power of the RFID
radio.
• “Configure Region” allows to view/change the regulatory settings (region of operation
and used frequencies).

IMPORTANT
Be sure to set the correct region: selecting a region different from the country of use
is illegal.

Install PFT application

Installation procedure
The PFT software automatically updates to the latest PFT version installed on the server,
upon each server connection. However, the PFT software can also be installed from a USB
drive.
• Connect the USB drive to the Workabout Pro 4 device.
• For the RFID driver, go through the USB driver to locate the PFT installation CAB file
dcm_pft_installer_2.0.x_windowsmobile.cab. Double tap the CAB file to start
installation. When installation is finished, the PFT application can be launched by
tapping the DCM PFT icon in the “Start” page:

Figure 9-17

298
PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Install PFT application

Installation finalization
• Locate the PFT CAB file on the USB drive. Tap and hold the CAB file until a pop-up
menu appears. Select “Copy”.
• Navigate to the root of the device by tapping the drop-down list at the top, then select
“My Device”:

Figure 9-18

299 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Install PFT application 9

• In the root directory tap “Menu” then “New Folder”. Set the name of the new folder to
“Donotdelete”:

Figure 9-19

• Double tap “Donotdelete” to open this directory. Tap and hold anywhere on screen to
bring up the pop-up menu, and select “Paste”. The CAB file should be copied to this
directory.
• Tap and hold the CAB file until the pop-up menu appears. Select “Rename” and change
the filename to “Initial_PFT”.

IMPORTANT
Make sure you get the directory and file names exactly correct – including the
correct case. This file is used by the auto installer for an automatic update of the
application.
• Hold the power button until the “Power Options” pop-up appears, then select “Power
off”.
• Press the power button again to restart the device.

300
PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Install PFT application

Create a PFT shortcut on desktop

• From the Windows desktop, tap on “Kiosk” -->“Settings…” --> “Shell Settings”:

Figure 9-20

• Tap “Add” then select “DCM PFT.lnk” item in the list and tap “OK”. You may change
the name of the shortcut and tap “OK”:

Figure 9-21

301 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Installing DCM PFT software > Install PFT application 9

• Check that “DCM PFT” is checked in the list then tap “OK” twice. In the Kiosk page, tap
on “Change to User mode”:

Figure 9-22

• Then tap “Yes” to reset. After reboot, DCM PFT link should be available on the desktop:

Figure 9-23

• When RFID drivers are installed, the PFT application can be started with this short-cut.

302
PFT Software
Transferring Field Units list by USB Drive > Install PFT application

Transferring Field Units list by USB Drive

A USB drive can also be used to transfer field unit lists to the Server-DCM if wireless
networking is unavailable.
• Exit the PFT by application (see Exiting the PFT application (page 284)).


• Open “File explorer” (tap the button and File Explorer):

Figure 9-24

• Browse to My Device --> Program Files --> PFT --> PFT Lists:

Figure 9-25

303 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Configuring the PFT application > Install PFT application 9

• Select all the files in this directory: tap Menu --> Select Files -->All:

Figure 9-26

• Go to Menu --> Edit --> Copy.

• Browse to Hard Disk (the USB drive).
• Go to Menu --> Edit --> Paste.
• Remove the USB drive and insert it into the Server-DCM.
• Copy the field unit list files from the USB drive to /export/home/userdcm/PFTLists on
a Server-DCM.

Configuring the PFT application

By default the PFT is ready to use when it is installed using the PFT CAB file. However,
there are some configuration settings that can be tweaked if necessary.
To view/edit these settings…
• The settings file can be found on the device at 
\Program Files\PFT\Vibtech\PFT.ini
• Copy the file to a PC using Windows Mobile Device Center or a USB flash drive.
• Make a backup copy of the file.
• View and edit the original file on a PC.
• Copy the file back to the device to the original location.
• The PFT will read the new settings on its next restart.

304
PFT Software
Configuring the PFT application > Install PFT application

The files contains the following settings that can be modified

Parameter Description Default

FileTransfer.remoteHost IP address of the FTP server. 10.1.0.1
Interval (in milliseconds) between
FileTransfer.ftpPollInterval_ms 5000 ms
FTP connection attempts.
Translatable text Line scanning
Translatable.LowToHigh Low To High
direction.
Translatable text Line scanning
Translatable.HighToLow High to Low
direction.
Translatable text Line scanning
Translatable.NoDirection N/A
direction.

Other settings should not be modified.

305 February 6, 2020

 PFT Software
Communication of PFT with Server-DCM > Preparing PFT software updates for wireless download to PFTs 9

Communication of PFT with Server-DCM

To communicate with a Server-DCM, the PFT application uses an FTP server to
automatically upload Field Units lists and download software updates whenever it comes
within range of the DCM wireless infrastructure.
Note On the DCM setup the FTP server is automatically configured during
installation.

Preparing PFT software updates for wireless download to PFTs

Every time the PFT connects to a Server-DCM it automatically checks if a new PFT installer
has been placed on the server. The PFT will automatically download and install the newest
CAB file on the server, if its revision is different to the PFT’s revision.
The software is only installed when the PFT is not being used to scan field units - i.e. when
the list name window is displayed. The PFT software consists of a CAB file named
dcm_pft_installer_2.0.x_windowsmobile.cab (where x.x is the revision number).
New versions of the PFT CAB file are installed on the Server-DCM by the Server-DCM
installer. PFT CABs can be found in /export/home/userdcm/PFTUpgrades. Follow the on-
screen prompts to install the new CAB file.
WARNING
The PFT will download and install an old CAB file if that CAB file is the newest on
the server. This can be used to roll-back to a previous revision. To avoid this, always
keep the latest installer in the PFTUpgrades directory on the server.

Testing the FTP server

The easiest way to test wireless networking and the FTP server is to create a field unit list
and check that it uploads correctly:
1. On the PFT create a new field unit list with the name “Test List”.
2. Scan a few field units or enter some fake field unit IDs using the keypad.
3. Click Done. The document icon should appear on the status bar of the front page.
4. As soon as the PFT gets a connection to the Server-DCM, it should automatically
upload this list.
5. The document icon on the status bar should disappear.
6. In the DCM client, use the “PFT” icon in the bottom right corner to load new field
unit lists from the PFT.
7. The PFT Lists should contain an entry with the name “Test List”.

306
Chapter

10 Field Equipment
Deployment

This chapter covers wireline telemetry. It includes the following

sections:

• Warnings and Cautions (page 308)

• Land and Marsh Equipment deployment (page 310)
• Auxiliary channels (page 319)
• 508XT Spread Layout Conventions (page 320)
• Handling and service information (page 323)
• WTU-508 Field Manipulation (page 325)
• Access Point Unit (page 338)
• Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) (page 351)
• LRC-508 (page 360)

508XT Installation Manual 307

 Field Equipment Deployment
Warnings and Cautions > 10

Warnings and Cautions

WARNING
It is highly recommended to disconnect Line and Transverse cables in case of
impending lightning, in order to protect personnel and equipment.

WARNING
Connector sockets are tightened with optimal torque and locked with glue prior to shipment
from the factory.
Do not attempt to re-tighten the sockets of any unit!

IMPORTANT
Whenever any connector is unused, put its connector protective cap in place.

CAUTION
To disconnect a battery from an CX-508 , do not disconnect the battery cord from
the battery terminals unless and until you have unplugged it from the 12V connector.

YES NO

Figure 10-1

308
Field Equipment Deployment
Warnings and Cautions >

IMPORTANT
In order to clean FM4 plugs, only use fresh water. Do not use any aggressive chemicals (like
petrol or gasoline) liable to attack plastic.
Prior to connecting any plug, make sure there is no water inside connectors.

IMPORTANT
Clean units with fresh water after shallow-water operations.

WARNING
For sacrificial anodes to provide effective protection against corrosion, it is essential to keep
them free of mud. Brush and/or wash off mud whenever possible.
Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless steel
attachments) and the metal housing of an CX-508.

309 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > Wireline telemetry equipment 10

Land and Marsh Equipment deployment

Wireline telemetry equipment
In this section:
• FDU-508 Field Manipulation (page 310)
• FDU-508 Links (page 312)
• SH Sercel geophone string connectors (page 313)
• DSU1-508 Manipulation (page 314)
• CX-508 Manipulation (page 315)
• Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) (page 317)

FDU-508 Field Manipulation

The FDU-508 is equipped with an LCK2 socket used to connect the input sensor.
CAUTION
Prior to turning and tightening the locking ring of the geophone plug, be sure correct
mating is achieved or else damage to the connector may result. Do not fumble about
for the mating position! Do not try to tighten the locking ring until mating is correct!

1. Mate the connectors without fumbling about.

2. Push the plug straight in and press firmly against the socket.

1
2

Figure 10-2

310
Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > FDU-508 Field Manipulation

3. Tighten the locking ring by hand.

Figure 10-3

311 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > FDU-508 Links 10

FDU-508 Links
Links are made up of one or more FDU-508s, with customized cable lengths. Below are
examples of 4x55m and 6x30mlinks. For assembly instructions, see 508XT Technical
Manual.

27.5 m 27.5 m

55 m
1‐FDU Link

FM4 FM4
Plug Plug
55 m

165 m

4‐FDU Link

FM4 FM4
Plug Plug
55 m

330 m
6‐FDU Link

Figure 10-4 FDU-508 links

WARNING
FDU-508 links are not designed for use on cable drums.

312
Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > SH Sercel geophone string connectors

SH Sercel geophone string connectors

SH17
SH2

Figure 10-5

Area to
lubricate

Clean with dry

wiper

Spray all round and

in between

Figure 10-6

313 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > DSU1-508 Manipulation 10

When used in severe environmental conditions, SH connectors should be lubricated

periodically.
1. Clean the area to lubricate with a dry wiper.
2. Spray the area to lubricate with SIL JET RHODORSIL or equivalent silicone oil.
3. Check for a silicone film deposit all round the mating areas and in between.
4. Put the protective cap in place. (Lubricated areas should not be exposed to dirt or
sand).

DSU1-508 Manipulation

Figure 10-7 DSU1-508

Line segments made up of DSUs can be incorporated anywhere into a 508XT spread (“line
segment” refers to any portion of line delimited by two CX-508). DSU1-508 line segments
should be homogeneous, i. e. not including any FDU-508s.

FDU-508 & DSU1-508 Power Supply Requirements

FDU-508s and DSUs operate from the DC voltage supplied by the next CX-508 on one side
or the other.
See also:
• Power Redundancy (page 321)

314
Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > CX-508 Manipulation

CX-508 Manipulation

Figure 10-8 CX-508

315 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > CX-508 Manipulation 10

CX-508 LED legend

Symbol Description LED Definitions

Transverse A ON: External device (TFOI-508, ERB-508) is detected on this

TA
(Green) port and communication with neighbor CX-508 is OK.
OFF: No external device deteced on this port.
Transverse B Blinking: External device is detected on this port but
TB
(Green) communication with neighbor CX-508 is not OK

Battery A
(Green) ON: A battery, within specification, is connected to this port.
A OFF: No battery is connected to this port.
Blinking: A battery connected to this port is out of specification
Battery B (too low or too high tension).
B (Green)

ON: CX-508 is synchronized and in Connected Mode.

OFF: Boot incomplete, Hardware failure or CX-508 not
Flag (Blue)
synchronized.
Blinking: CX-508 synchronized and in Autonomous mode.

ON: External device (LRC-508, FT-508, DH-508) detected on

XDP and communication with this device is OK.
Gear Wheel
OFF: No external device detected on XDP.
(orange)
Blinking: External device detected on XDP, but
communication with this device is not OK.

Note To prevent the line from being disrupted when you are replacing a

low battery on an CX-508, first connect the fresh battery to the spare 12 VDC
connector, then remove the low battery.
The line portion delimited by two CX-508 is referred to as “Line segment”. A line segment
must be homogeneous, i. e. include a single type of unit. FDU-508, DSU1-508, are examples
of types of units that can be used in different line segments, but never to be used jointly
within the same line segment. See also Power Redundancy (page 321).
The CX-508 operates from a standard 12 V battery (10.5 to 15 V DC). It is equipped with
two power input connectors that allow battery replacement without causing any disruption
in the power supply.

316
Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

The fibre optics extender (TFOI) is available in different lengths (up to 2 km).

Figure 10-9 TFOI fiber optics interface and cable

The wire-line end of the TFOI interface box must be connected directly to one of the
Transverse ports of a CX-508, or the wall-mount input panel on the recording cab.
Because a different interface card is used at either end, the colour of the interface box is
different (green/red), but you can connect it in either direction: you can connect, say, the
green end to a Right Transverse port (then connect the red end to a Left port), or the other
way round.
In transition zone operations, the Transverse equipment may be subjected to high tension as
a result of currents exerting stress on cables and terminations: the longer the cable length
between anchoring points, the higher the tension. Therefore, it is recommended to clamp 5-
kg ballast blocks on the fibre optic cable every 50 m, using bend-stiffeners.

317 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Land and Marsh Equipment deployment > CX-508 spacing vs FDU-508 spacing 10

CX-508 spacing vs FDU-508 spacing

The table below gives the maximum allowable number of FDU-508 between two CX-508
(including passive channels in Detour (if applicable), depending on the cable length.

Max. cable length between Max. number of FDU-508 between CX-

FDU-508 508s

13.75m / 45ft 96

27.5m / 90ft 80

55m / 180ft 64

70m / 230ft 60

CX-508 spacing vs DSU1-508 spacing

The table below gives the maximum allowable number of DSU1-508 between two CX-508
(including passive channels in Detour (if applicable)), depending on the cable length.

Max. cable length between Max. number of DSU1-508 between CX-

DSU1-508 508s

13.75m / 45ft 106

27.5m / 90ft 92

55m / 180ft 74

70m / 230ft 68

318
Field Equipment Deployment
Auxiliary channels > Wireline auxiliary channels

Auxiliary channels
Wireline auxiliary channels
The signals to be recorded as auxiliary traces can be connected to the SCI-508. The FDU-
508 Serial Number is associated with the auxiliary signal on the HCI, in the “Auxiliary”
Layout Setup.

SCI-508 Signals from source controller

Auxiliary channels (max. 120)

Figure 10-10 Auxiliary channels

FDU-508s anywhere in the spread can also be used as Auxiliary channels.

319 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
508XT Spread Layout Conventions > 508XT Spread Modes 10

508XT Spread Layout Conventions

508XT Spread Modes
The 508XT allows you to work simultaneously in different modes.

Figure 10-11 Different spread modes

1. By default, the 508XT spread is always in acquisition. Units can be connected

directly to the network, or they can be connected to a radio link. Units may also be
working autonomously.
2. Spread is in Layout/Test mode. Even during production, testing can be performed on
connected field units.

320
Field Equipment Deployment
508XT Spread Layout Conventions > Power Redundancy

Power Redundancy
In a typical spread the CX-508 provides power at both ends of a line, ensuring power
redundancy.

Figure 10-12 Power redundancy

321 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
508XT Spread Layout Conventions > Data Path Redundancy 10

Data Path Redundancy

In case of a disruption along a line due to a broken wire or line cut, data is rerouted when a
connection is available.
Otherwise data is stored locally on the CX-508. For disrupted lines, data can be collected
from the CX-508.

Figure 10-13 Data path redundancy

322
Field Equipment Deployment
Handling and service information > Data Path Redundancy

Handling and service information

Connector mating
When connecting a cable to a CX-508, it is important to make sure the threads are free of any
scraps or sand grains. Also, be sure the plug and socket are perfectly aligned prior to trying
to turn the locking ring. This will ensure correct mating and prolonged connector life.

Push straight in

Figure 10-14 Connector mating to CX-508

Unless the plug and socket are perfectly aligned, the locking ring will fail to grasp both
thread ends on the socket, which may tear off the threads and/or crack the receptacle
(Figure 10-15).

Thread end (one on either side) Crack

Figure 10-15

323 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Handling and service information > Data Path Redundancy 10

Protection against corrosion

Protection against corrosion on FDU-508 units is provided by a sacrificial anode which
should be replaced after 50% of its volume is eaten away. Be sure to put lockwashers back
in place. Torque to 0. 9 Nm.
Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless steel attachments)
and the housing of an FDU-508 or DSU1-508.

Line, Trans, Power, XDP connectors

Prior to any underwater mating, lubricate Line connectors.

324
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > Powering up the WTU-508 using Geophone Connection

WTU-508 Field Manipulation

The WTUs should be deployed at the receiver groups, powered up and brought into operation
as described in detail below.
IMPORTANT
Before deploying WTUs on the field, ensure that you have synchronized the
acquisition parameters defined in the DCM. See Field Unit Parameters in the DCM
Functional Manual.

The WTU is normally powered from its internal battery, and it should be ensured that the
battery is fully charged before deployment. See section PFT Specifications (page 237).
Before connecting the geophone string to the WTU, it is important that the geophones are
properly deployed in their correct position and orientation.
The internal power supply of the WTU is enabled by plugging a geophone string into the
LCK2 sensor connector or a Plug WTU-508, see Powering up the WTU-508 using
Geophone Connection (page 325).
The connector should first be correctly oriented, then pushed straight in and pressed firmly
against the socket. If a lock-ring is present on the geophone string connector, it should be
tightened by hand only. See section WTU-508 Field Manipulation (page 325). When
the geophone string is plugged in, the WTU will enter a power-up boot sequence, which
should take about 1 minute to complete. The boot sequence is indicated by the Operation
LED flashing very rapidly, this should take approximately 1 minute to complete.

Powering up the WTU-508 using Geophone Connection

The WTU-508 is equipped with an LCK2 socket used to connect the input sensor
(geophone). 

CAUTION
Prior to turning and tightening the locking ring of the geophone plug, be sure correct
mating is achieved or else damage to the connector may result. Do not fumble about
for the mating position! Do not try to tighten the locking ring until mating is correct!

1. Mate the connectors without fumbling about.

2. Push the plug straight in and press firmly against the socket.

325 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > Powering up the WTU-508 using Geophone Connection 10

2
1

Figure 10-16

3. Tighten the locking ring by pushing firmly.

Figure 10-17

326
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > Powering up the WTU-508 using Geophone Connection

Powering up the WTU-508 using Plug WTU-508

When plugged into a geophone connector the Plug WTU-50 (Ref. 10009857) allows to
wakeup a WTU-508. Wireless communication is then possible with the WTU unit for the
setup or harvesting phase at base camp.

Plug WTU-508 Plug WTU-508

connected to WTU-508
Figure 10-18 Plug WTU-508

The Plug WTU-508 can be used in two scenarios.

327 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > Powering up the WTU-508 using Geophone Connection 10

1. Configuration of the WTU-508 settings:

WTU‐508

APU

Figure 10-19 WTU-508 Configuration setup

2. WTU-508 Harvesting:

WTU‐508

DH‐508

Figure 10-20 WTU-508 harvest

328
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern

WTU-508 LED Pattern

LED
blinking

Figure 10-21 LED blinking during power-up

Upon wakeup, the WTU will perform a test of the geophone string, including a tilt test to
ensure that the geophones are correctly planted, therefore it is important that the geophones
are not disturbed during this period, and that as little ground noise as possible is generated.
Completion of the boot and test phase is indicated by the Operation LED changing rate to
either 1 flash per second or 1 flash every 4 seconds. The latter indicates that no faults were
detected during the boot test, whereas the former indicates the detection of either a sensor
resistance fault or a geophone tilt test failure. If a fault is detected, the geophones and their
planting should be investigated.
In order for the integral GPS receiver to receive the best possible signal, the WTU should be
placed on the ground vertically, and as far away as possible from objects that may obstruct
the receiver’s view of the sky, such as trees or buildings.

329 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern 10

Figure 10-22 WTU placed in open space

Once the WTU boot sequence is complete, the WTU will acquire GPS and establish a
Pathfinder network connection or a Wireless infrastructure connection. The status of these is
indicated by the colour and flash rate of the Communication LED. This is described in the
table below.

330
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern

Table 10-1 LED Patterns

COMMUNICATION
Status WTU STATE
LED

WTU is not connected to any network

OFF
(Multihop nor Infrastructure)

WTU is ONLY connected to a Multihop Heartbeat

CONNECTION
network (no infrastructure connection) (1 flash every 4s)
STATUS
WTU is connected to an Infrastructure
Flashing
network (Wi-Fi with high RSSI or
(1 flash per sec)
Ethernet)

GPS is locked and WTU is connected

to any network (Multihop or Green
Infrastructure)

GPS is unlocked and WTU is

GPS STATUS connected to any network (Multihop or Red
Infrastructure)

GPS is unlocked and WTU is NOT

Panic Red
connected to any network (Multihop
(rapid flash)
nor Infrastructure)

Once the WTU has achieved GPS lock, it will immediately begin acquiring data. The
exception to this would be if the working hours have been so configured that the WTU would
normally be in sleep mode at the time of the deployment.
Table 10-2 gives a full description of the LED patterns, while Table 10-3 describes
some LED patterns that are likely to be most commonly encountered.

331 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern 10

Table 10-2 WTU LED Patterns Reference

COMMUNICATION
OPERATIONAL LED
LED OPERATOR
WTU STATE
ACTION
Flash Colour Flash Colour

GENERAL

The operator
shall replace
Panic Red Panic Red Critical Failure the WTU
because of
failure

BATTERY STATUS

The WTU is powered on

and :
No External battery
connected and Internal
XXX Green XXX XXX battery charge OK None
OR
External battery connected
and External battery
voltage OK

The WTU is powered on

and :
The operator
External battery connected
shall check
XXX Amber XXX XXX and External battery
the external
voltage KO
battery
AND
Internal Battery charge OK

The operator
shall check
the internal
The WTU is powered on
battery
XXX Red XXX XXX and :
(charge or
Internal Battery charge Low
replace the
WTU if
necessary)

ACQUISITION STATUS

The WTU boots up ( the

Panic XXX XXX XXX None
acquisition is not started yet)

332
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern

Table 10-2 WTU LED Patterns Reference

Acquisition and storage are

running correctly and : The operator
Flashing XXX XXX XXX Sensor resistance: fail shall check
OR the sensor
Tilt: fail

Acquisition and storage are

running correctly
Sensor resistance: pass
Heartbeat XXX XXX XXX None
AND
Tilt: pass
Or BIT

CONNECTION STATUS

WTU is not connected to any

XXX XXX OFF OFF network (Multihop nor None
Infrastructure)

WTU is ONLY connected to

XXX XXX Heartbeat XXX a Multihop network (no None
infrastructure connection)

WTU is connected to an
XXX XXX Flashing XXX Infrastructure network (Wi-Fi None
with high RSSI or Ethernet)

GPS STATUS

GPS is locked and WTU is

XXX XXX XXX Green connected to any network None
(Multihop or Infrastructure)

GPS is unlocked and WTU is

XXX XXX XXX Red connected to any network Check GPS
(Multihop or Infrastructure)

GPS is unlocked and WTU is

NOT connected to any
XXX XXX Panic Red Check GPS
network (Multihop nor
Infrastructure)

SPECIFIC MODES

Alternate Alternate
Flashing Red & Flashing Red & Firmware upgrade None
Green Green

333 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 LED Pattern 10

Table 10-2 WTU LED Patterns Reference

Charge mode :
Flashing Red Flashing Red Internal battery charge < 80 None
%

Charge mode :
Flashing Amber Flashing Amber Internal battery charge > 80 None
%

Charge mode :
Flashing Green Flashing Green None
Internal battery fully charged

Storage mode :
Panic Green Panic Amber Internal battery charging up None
to the configured thershold

Internal battery discharging

Panic Red Panic Amber up to the configured None
thershold

XXX = Don’t care

Panic = rapid flash
Heartbeat = 1 flash every 4 seconds
Flashing = 1 flash per second

Table 10-3 Common LED Patterns

COMMUNICATION
OPERATIONAL LED
LED OPERATOR
WTU STATE
ACTION
Flash Colour Flash Colour

Full Autonomous
Heartbeat Green OFF OFF None
Everything OK

Autonomous with
Heartbeat Green Heartbeat Green Multihop None
Everything OK

Infrastructure/Gateway
Heartbeat Green Flashing Green None
Everything OK

Full Autonomous Check internal

Heartbeat Red OFF OFF
Internal battery Low battery

334
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 Charger

Table 10-3 Common LED Patterns

Autonomous with
Multihop
Flashing Green Heartbeat Green Check sensor
Battery OK
Sensor Error

Full Autonomous
Panic Green Panic Red Battery OK Check GPS
GPS unlocked

Full Autonomous
Heartbeat XXX OFF OFF None
Everything OK

XXX = Don’t care

Panic = rapid flash
Heartbeat = 1 flash every 4 seconds
Flashing = 1 flash per second

WTU-508 Charger
A charger unit is available for charging the internal battery of the WTU. This charger has the
following features.
• Powered from 110Vac/220Vac
• Can charge up to 10 WTUs simultaneously
• Contains an Ethernet switch for cable harvesting of WTUs while charging
• Has two RJ45 Ethernet ports to allow connection of Data Harvester or daisy-
chaining of chargers
• Has a rack-mountable housing

335 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 Charger 10

Two RJ45 Ethernet Connectors

Mains Power Input Combined charging and

Ethernet cables

Figure 10-23 WTU-508 charger connectors

The charger units can be daisy-chained using Ethernet cables so that more than 10 WTUs can
be harvested simultaneously by one Data Harvester. This is illustrated in the graphic below.

336
Field Equipment Deployment
WTU-508 Field Manipulation > WTU-508 Charger

Figure 10-24 WTU-508 charger daisy chain configuration

337 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Nomenclature 10

Access Point Unit

The Access Point Unit allows WTU Field Units to connect to the wired network via Wi-Fi. 

WARNING
Please read through all steps of the assembly procedure and referenced chapters
before commencing assembly.

WARNING
Do not apply power to the APU until all other assembly steps have been described,
as damage to sensitive electronics components may occur.

Access Point Unit Nomenclature

The Access Point Unit is delivered as follows:

Item Quantity Picture

ACCESS POINT WLAN including:

MikroTik RBMetalG-52SHPacn 802.11ac 1

Dual Band 2.4/5 Ghz antenna 1

Angled N connector 1

Gigabit PoE injector 1

Metal rings 2

Mounting loops 2

338
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Nomenclature

24 V 0.8 A power adapter 1

Cigarette lighter
1
to Jack DC Ø2,1/5,5 cable (1m)

DC male Ø2,1/5,5 to wire cable (2m) 1

Battery tap + 1

Battery tap - 1

Terminal ring tongue Ø6 2

Rugged Ethernet cable (5m) 1

339 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Installation 10

Access Point Unit Installation

1. Connect the Dual Band 2.4/5 Ghz antenna on the N-Male connector of MikroTik
RBMetalG-52SHPacn 802.11ac directly (or using the Angled N connector,
depending on the installation constraints – optional). In any case, the Dual Band 2.4/
5 Ghz antenna must be vertically oriented.

Recommended Optional
Configuration Configuration

2. Use the latches to open the product case, to reveal the Ethernet connector

3. Pass the RJ45 plug of the rugged Ethernet cable through the hole and plug it.

340
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Installation

4. Close the product case using latches and cut the round rubber insulator on one side to
clamp it around the cable

5. Install the insulator in the hole

341 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Installation 10

6. Install device on an outdoor mast (same tripod column as the ERB-508) using the
Metal rings or mountings loops

7. Connect the other extremity of Ethernet cable to the Gigabit PoE injector, then
connect RJ45 plug of the Gigabit PoE injector to the switch, computer, laptop or
tablet. 

342
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Access Point Unit Installation

Several options are possible to inject power supply:

#
OPTION A OPTION B OPTION C OPTION D

Picture

DC male Ø2,1/5,5 to
DC male Ø2,1/5,5 to
Cigarette lighter wire cable (2m) &
24 V 0.8 A wire cable (2m) &
Description to Jack DC Ø2,1/ Terminal ring tongue Ø6
power adapter Terminal ring tongue Ø6
5,5 cable (1m) &
crimped
Battery tap +&-
Power Cigarette lighter Laboratory power
100-240V ~ Automotive battery 12V
input plug supply (24V)

343 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration 10

APU Standard Configuration

First connection
The initial configuration must be done on Windows using the winbox application. The
winbox application can be found on the Mikrotik website (https://mikrotik.com/download)
or on the DCM RedHat installation USB key, at tools/windows/winbox.
1. Connect the MikroTik RBMetalG-52SHPacn 802.11ac to your PC with an Ethernet
cable and power it.
2. Open the winbox application.
3. Go to the Neighbors view and refresh it.
4. The device should appear in the list. You can check the mac address and compare it
with the one written on the device.
5. Select the correct device in the list, input admin as login, leave the password blank
and press connect.

Password
This step is optional but recommended since it provides more security.
1. Open the System → Password menu

344
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration

2. Change the password to your liking.

AP configuration
1. Open the quick set menu.
2. Select the WISP AP mode.

3. In the Wireless section, modify the following fields:

• Country: Change the country first -- since available frequencies depend on
it.
• Network name: DefaultSercelSSID by default or use the custom SSID set in
parameters.
If you work using Wifi 5GHz (recommended, if compliant with local regulations):
• Band: 5GHz-A/N
• Channel Width: 20MHz
• Frequency: 5200 (channel 40) or 5220 (channel 44) or 5240 (channel 48)
4. If you work using Wifi 2.4Ghz:
• Band: 2GHz-only-G
• Frequency: 2412 (channel 1) or 2437 (channel 6) or 2462 (channel 11)

345 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration 10

• Channel Width: 20MHz

 
5. In the Configuration section:
• Mode: Bridge

 
6. In the Bridge section:
• Address acquisition: static
• IP address: use a 10.10.x.x address
• Netmask: 255.0.0.0

 
6. After Bridge configuration, press the OK button. The device will restart, wait few
seconds and enter the new password in the corresponding field in Winbox, then click
the “Reconnect” button.

346
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration

7. From the menu, open Wireless view.

 
8. Go to the Security Profiles section

9. Create a new profile:

• Name: WEP
• Mode: Static keys optional

 
• In the Static Keys view
• Key 0: 40bit wep - your WEP password (default is 1324556777)
• Transmit Key: key 0

347 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration 10

10. Press the OK button

11. From the menu, go to the Interfaces view.
12. Select the wlan1
13. (double-click)
14. Change the security profile to: WEP

15. Press the OK button

The device is now configured on a 10.x.x.x network. You can continue to use winbox to
configure the device or use the web interface accessible at the IP address you provided.

APU Reset Procedure

1. Press “Reset” button before boot, power ON the APU and keep pressing the button
until the LED flashing (5 to 10 sec).
2. Waiting for reboot (beeps twice).
3. Open the Winbox application.
4. In Neighbors tab, click the “Refresh” button.

348
Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > APU Standard Configuration

5. Select your device and then click the “Connect” button.

6. A popup windows should appear, click on “Remove Configuration”.

349 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Access Point Unit > Wifi Channel Frequencies 10

Wifi Channel Frequencies

List of available frequencies working with WTU-508:

2.4 GHz 5 GHz

Channel Frequency Channel Frequency

1 2412 40 5200

6 2437 44 5220

11 2462 48 5240

350
Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > ERB-508 contents

Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508)

The 508 Ethernet Radio Bridge is a wireless datalink that can be used in place of a 508XT
Line or Transverse cable. It provides 100 Mbps bandwidth at a maximum range of 1km with
the tripod supplied by Sercel, but longer distances can be achieved at lower data rate (up to
15km) or when using higher mast.
Note Maximum range is dependent on RF transmission conditions and local RF
regulations.

Figure 10-25 ERB-508 Field composition

ERB-508 contents
The system is composed of two half-bridges each containing:
• 1 Ethernet radio bridge interface
• 1 ODU radio bridge unit (5.4-5.7GHz) Amber Crystal IHPR MIMO AC2X2
Radio from Wireless Excellence
• 1 Tripod + Mast
• Cables

351 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Connections 10

Connections
A 12V battery is required for each half bridge, it is recommended to use the same battery as
used for CX-508 (Radio Bridge Power Consumption = 10W).
ODU Ethernet
ODU Ethernet
Radio Bridge
Radio Bridge
SLAVE
MASTER

Ethernet Radio Ethernet Radio

Bridge Box Bridge Box

XL XL

Figure 10-26 ERB-508 to CX-508 connection

Each half bridge is configured as “Master” or “Slave” prior to shipment from Sercel and
tagged accordingly. It is preferable to connect the “Master” on the recording truck side for
access to additional features.

352
Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Connections

Isolate ERB from mast

CAUTION
Possible equipment damage!
It is important to isolate the ODU Ethernet Radio Bridge from the mast it is attached
to. Use the DUCT TAPE supplied with ERB-508 kit to proceed.
Cut 300 cm of Duct TAPE and make at least 6 turns around the mast as shown below.
Cover a length of 15cm on the top of the mast, making 6 turns of DUCT TAPE over all this
length:

Figure 10-27 Duct Tape on Mast

Place the ODU Ethernet Radio Bridge on the DUCT TAPE, ensure there is no direct contact
between the metallic mast and the holding feature. Final mounting should appear like this:

Figure 10-28 ERB positioned on Mast

353 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Radio Configuration (base camp) 10

Radio Configuration (base camp)

The Radio Bridge has to be configured prior to first use, in order to setup radio parameters
to conform to regulatory domain and to manage different radio bridges (if any).
Different parameters should be configured (SSID, country code, frequency/channel) at the
base camp.
Use a laptop to connect to the radio bridge.
Configure the laptop network to access to 192.168.1.xx network (subnet mask
255.255.255.0).
Use for example 192.168.1.2 for the laptop IP address.

Figure 10-29 IP address properties

Configuration procedure
Connect the radio bridge to ERB Interface.
Connect a battery to the ERB Interface. The radio bridge powers up and generates a first tone,
followed by two tones a few seconds after. The bridge is then ready to access.
Connect the laptop network cable to the ERB Interface using the Transverse Adaptor (P/N
10019884).
Launch the http browser (Firefox recommended) at the radio bridge IP address. Browse on
http://192.168.1.100/webfig/ (Master unit) or http://192.168.1.101/webfig/ (Slave unit).

354
Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Radio Configuration (base camp)

Default login is ADMIN and no password is required.

From Interface menu, click on wlan1 to access wireless parameters.

355 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Radio Configuration (base camp) 10

On Wireless menu, click on Advanced Mode menu to be able to configure country selection.

Set Country Code

356
Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Radio Bridge Setup (on the Field)

In case of multiple radio bridge use, or for convenience, set SSID.

Optionally, frequency and channel selection are possible, even if it is recommended to use
default configuration (auto).
WARNING
Use the same parameters on Master unit and Slave Unit.
If Slave Unit is configured through the radio path (access through the Master through radio),
change the Slave first.
The radio bridge can be switched off by removing battery from ERB Interface. The
configuration is automatically saved.

Radio Bridge Setup (on the Field)

The deployment of the Radio Bridge on the field requires a setup procedure to check the
radio link quality.
Signal strength can be monitored on wireless menu.

A signal to noise ratio of 25dB minimum is recommended to ensure good radio link quality.

357 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Radio Bridge Setup (on the Field) 10

Bandwidth tests can be performed on tools menu.

This tool helps to point the radio bridge as best as possible by monitoring radio throughput.
Do not leave the radio bridge in test before disconnecting.

358
Field Equipment Deployment
Ethernet Radio Bridge (ERB-508) > Ethernet Radio Bridge Components

Ethernet Radio Bridge Components

ERB-508 10027225

Part Number Description Quantity

10031591 ERB-508 Interface 2

10032028 Radio Antenna 1

7790007 Tripod Aluminum Column 2

756085189A Guy-Rope Anchoring 428 2

756089527A Extender, Tripod 2

10009905 Guying kit LRB 2

10035795 ERB Antenna Cable 2

10035884 CX ERB Cable 2

10040157 ERB Power Cable 2

10019884 SCI Transverse Adapter 2

359 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
LRC-508 > LRC-508 Contents 10

LRC-508
Connected to a CX-508 operating in autonomous mode, the LRC-508 allows QC
communication with the recording truck through a neighbouring CX-508 located in a
connected spread.

LRC-508 in
Connected spread

LRC-508 in
Autonomous
spread

Figure 10-30 LRC-508 field scenario

LRC-508 Contents
The LRC-508 kit (Ref.10011988) is composed of:
• 1 (or 2) LRC-508 box
• 1 Antenna
• 1 LRC cable (2 meters)

LRC cable
LRC-508
Box

Antenna

Figure 10-31 LRC-508 Contents

360
Field Equipment Deployment
LRC-508 > Connections

Connections
The LRC-508 connects to the XDP plug of the CX-508.
The CX-508 powers the LRC. When an LRC is plugged into the CX-508 a light sequence
alerts you with regard to setup and ready.

LED

Figure 10-32 LRC-508 connected to CX-508

WARNING
When disconnecting, you MUST first remove the XDP cable connected to the CX-
508 before removing the end of the cable connected to the LRC-508.

LRC-508 LED Light Sequence

The LRC contains an orange LED to inform you of the LRC status:
• Blinking LED: indicates LRC is detected. Setup is in progress:
• Fixed LED: indicates LRC is ready.

361 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Deployment
LRC-508 > LRC-508 Spare Parts 10

LRC-508 Spare Parts

LRC-508 10011988

Part Number Description Quantity

10011873 LRC-508 Box (CE) 1

10013957 LRC Mast 1

10012042 LRC Tripod 1

10001843 Omni directional Antenna (2,4GHz, 7,4 Dbi)) 1

10018228 Case 1

10022127 Antenna shock absorber 1

10013654 LRC External Cable (2M) 1

362
Chapter

11 Data Harvester CX-508

This chapter describes how to install Data Harvester CX-508

software on a tablet PC.

• Overview (page 364)

• Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation (page 365)

508XT Installation Manual 363

 Data Harvester CX-508
Overview > 11

Overview
This chapter describes how to install Data Harvester CX-508 software on a Tablet PC.

Figure 11-33 DH-508 on Tetra RT12 or U11i tablet

364
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Data Harvester CX-508 Hardware

Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation

Data Harvester CX-508 Hardware
For a complete description of the PC tablet, please see the section Tablet Computer
(page 73) in the chapter Hardware.

Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

IMPORTANT
Important information concerning installation:
• To complete the installation, you must have a Data Harvester CX-508 USB installation
key (ref. 10047854).
• The Data Harvester CX-508 USB key must be write locked.
• You must use the pen to tap on the touch screen. Fingers are not advised
• A virtual keyboard is available.

Figure 11-34 Virtual keyboard

CAUTION
Before commencing installation ensure the FN button is switched Off.

365 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

Figure 11-35

Installation Procedure
1. Switch off the tablet by pressing the power button for 5 seconds.
2. Plug the USB key in one of the USB ports at the bottom of the right side of the
Tablet PC.
3. Press the power button and press ENTER for 2 seconds:
until the BIOS is displayed:

366
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

367 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

4. Press the right arrow until the Save and Exit window is displayed.

5. Use the down arrow to select UEFI: <USB_KEY_NAME > in the 


Boot Override list, and press ENTER . The tablet boots on the USB key and
the Data Harvester 508 product install begins. This process is completely automated.

368
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

6. When the following screen is displayed, click “ENTER”.

Figure 11-36 Press Enter to start Installation menus

7. Select Install Sercel 508 Field Tester software on Tetra Tablet, when the screen
below is displayed.

Figure 11-37 Select Tetra tablet

369 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

8. Since the Clock Setup Appears, set the clock about 10 minutes before the real
Time

Figure 11-38 Clock setup

Example:
- Watch shows 16h30
- Tablet set to 16h20
Click “Done” when time is set up.

370
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

9. The Install Process starts automatically.

Figure 11-39 Progress bar of Installation sequence

Once the install process is finished, the tablet will reboot automatically.
10. The system will detect the USB Key again. 
- Remove the USB key 
- Click in the key Button to restart the Tablet again.

Figure 11-40 Restart sequence

371 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

11. The tablet will restart and begin the second part of the installation:

12. When the installation is completed, the next window invites you to input a valid 508
Harvester license. If you don’t have one, you must request one. Press OK to validate
the license key.

372
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

13. Continue Installation by the Patch Installation

Figure 11-41 DH-508 Server patch installer

373 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

Figure 11-42 DH-508 Client patch installer

14. The DH-508 application is now fully installed. 

To restart the system, click on the “ON/OFF” button and click on “Restart
Computer” on the screen.

Figure 11-43 Restart computer

374
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software

IMPORTANT
The next steps are important to setup the Clock of the tablet.

15. After restart check the clocks. The Tablet’s Clock must still show 10 minutes
discrepancy before the real Clock 
If not, right click on the Clock Icon, and select “Adjust Date and Time” 
Result: Time on tablet still 10 minutes before real time.
Note Enter the Root Password (administrator) to finalize the setup.

16. Connect the Tablet to the 508 Server

Note Wait for the “Led” to turn green on FT-508 interface.

375 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Installing Data Harvester CX-508 Application Software 11

17. Check the new time on the tablet Clock.

Figure 11-44 Tablet clock automatically setup by the CU-508

Local time (Time on watch) and Clock on tablet show the same time.
18. Select Restart Computer in the System menus.

Figure 11-45 Restart Computer option

376
Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Hints and Tips

19. Check the time on the tablet Clock after the Tablet reboot.

Figure 11-46 Tablet clock and Date are up to date

Hints and Tips

Restarting the System

To restart the system, just click on the button with the key icon and select “Restart Computer”
on the screen.

Figure 11-47

Do not use the button. This button only puts the tablet in standby mode in order to save
power. 

377 February 6, 2020

 Data Harvester CX-508
Data Harvester CX-508 Software Installation > Hints and Tips 11

If the button is pressed for 3 seconds, the power supply will be stopped. However,
the operating system is not stopped properly, it could be corrupted and not restart properly.

Set the tablet in standby mode

To save batteries, the tablet must be in standby mode when not in use.

To set the table in standby mode, just push briefly the button.

Figure 11-48

378
Chapter

12 Handheld-508 Software

In this chapter:

• Installing Drivers (page 380)

• Ethernet Configuration (page 385)
• SL-508 (page 387)
• DT-508 (page 395)
• IT-508 (page 403)

508XT Installation Manual 379

 Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers > Using PC and USB Connection 12

Installing Drivers
Using PC and USB Connection

Prerequisites
• File Sercel_WAP4_Drivers_InstallV*.*.exe
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.
Note To check if Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center has already been
installed, go to Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features, and check
if Windows Mobile Device Center is in the list. The version should be 6.1 or
higher.

Driver Installation
1. Power On and Connection:
• With the Motorola WAP4 on the docking station, power on the WAP4 so that it can be
detected.
• Connect the docking station to the USB port of the desktop or laptop computer.
• Wait for the Windows Mobile Device Center Setup Wizard to appear and the status is
Connected

Figure 12-1

2. Installing WAP4 drivers:

On the PC:
• From the installation directory, double click on file
Sercel_WAP4_Drivers_InstallV*.*.exe

380
Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers > Using PC and USB Connection

Figure 12-2

• Select I Agree on the license if you agree to the License Agreement terms

Figure 12-3

• Click Install on the Installation Options screen

381 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers > Using PC and USB Connection 12

Figure 12-4

On the WAP4:
• Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install on the screen of each cab file to
be installed:
• Axed_serial*.cab
• UsbOn.cab
• SDF.cab

Figure 12-5

• Tap OK when the installation is finished

382
Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers > Using .cab files and USB storage device

Figure 12-6

Using .cab files and USB storage device

Prerequisites
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.
• Files
• Axed_serial*.cab
• UsbOn.cab
• SDF.cab

Driver Installation
1. Copy the cab files to an SD or USB storage device.
2. Ensure that the battery is present, and the device is in a powered docking station.
3. Insert the storage device.
4. Boot the device.
5. Using File Explorer, browse to the cab files on storage media (Hard Disk).

383 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
Installing Drivers > Using .cab files and USB storage device 12

6. Tap on the cab file.

7. Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-7

384
Handheld-508 Software
Ethernet Configuration > Using .cab files and USB storage device

8. Tap OK when installation is finished

Figure 12-8

9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each cab file.

Ethernet Configuration
• On the WAP4, navigate to Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi.

Figure 12-9

• Tap on ASIX AX8872 USB 2.0 Fast Ethernet Driver

• Select Use specific IP address and enter
• (with multiple WAP4s, is there a range of acceptable IP addresses?)

385 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
Ethernet Configuration > Using .cab files and USB storage device 12

• IP address:172.27.128.10
• Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
• Default gateway:172.27.128.1

Figure 12-10

386
Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Overview

SL-508
Overview
The Sercel Launch 508 (SL-508) is an application automatically started when the Motorola
Workabout Pro 4 is powered on. It presents a list of Sercel installed applications that can be
run on the device.
For DT-508 and IT-508 applications, there is a one-time setup to install required drivers and
configure network settings. Please consult instructions in the associated user manuals for this
installation. For the Sercel Launch application, choose between method Installation Using
PC and USB Connection (page 387) or method Installation using .cab files and
USB Storage device (page 392) to install the Sercel Launch application.

Installing SL-508 Software Application

Using PC and USB Connection

Prerequisites
• File Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.

Installation
1. Remove any previously installed Sercel Launch application:
On the WAP4:
• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs

387 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application 12

• Select SERCEL SercelLaunch 508 V*.*

Figure 12-11

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Power On and Connection:
• Power on the Motorola WAP4 so that it can be detected.
• Connect the Motorola WAP4 to the USB port of the desktop or laptop computer.
• Wait for the Windows Mobile Device Center Setup Wizard to appear and the status is
Connected.

388
Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application

Figure 12-12

3. Installing Sercel Launch application:

On the PC:
• On the CD, double click on file Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• Select I Agree on the license if you agree to the License Agreement terms

Figure 12-13

389 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application 12

• The SercelLaunch application is automatically selected. Click Install

Figure 12-14

Figure 12-15

• If the SercelLaunch application has already been installed, you will be asked to reinstall
it.

Figure 12-16

390
Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application

• Wait for the installation to be completed on the PC

Figure 12-17

On the WAP4:
• Leave “Device” selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-18

• Tap OK when the installation is finished

391 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application 12

Installation using .cab files and USB Storage device

Prerequisites:
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.
• File SercelLaunchV*.*_WAP.cab

Sercel Launch Installation:

1. Remove any previously installed Sercel Launch application. 
On the WAP4:
• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs

Figure 12-19

392
Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application

• Select SERCEL Inventory Tool 508 V*.*

Figure 12-20

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Copy the cab file to an SD or USB storage device.
3. Ensure that the battery is present, and the device is in a powered docking station.
4. Insert the storage device.
5. Boot the device.
6. Using File Explorer, browse to the cab file on the storage media (Hard Disk).

393 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
SL-508 > Installing SL-508 Software Application 12

Figure 12-21

7. Tap on the cab file.

8. Leave “Device” selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-22

9. Tap OK when installation is finished.

394
Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Overview

DT-508
Overview
The Sercel Deploying Tool 508 (DT-508) application is used to assist in the field deployment
of field equipment such as Concentrators (CX-508) and Nodes (FDU-508 and DSU-508) on
an autonomous spread.
This consists of managing assignments, detours, snaking detours, and mutes. After this
information is collected, it can be uploaded to the 508-HCI server via Ethernet cabling.
The DT-508 software application runs on a hand-held PDA.

Figure 12-23 DT-508

Before installing the DT-508 software, there is a one-time setup to install required drivers and
configure network settings. Choose between
• One time driver installation Using PC and USB Connection (page 380) and
• One time Driver Installation Using .cab files and USB storage device
(page 383) for a one-time installation
and then follow Section Ethernet Configuration for a one-time configuration setup. Finally,
choose between the methods below to install the DT-508 application:
• Installing DT-508 Software application or method or
• Installation using .cab files and USB Storage device

395 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application 12

Installing DT-508 Software application

Using PC and USB Connection

Prerequisites
• File DT-508V*.*_Cab_Install.exe or file Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.

Installation
1. Remove any previously installed DT-508 application:
On the WAP4:
• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs
• Select Sercel Deploy Tool 508 V*.*

Figure 12-24

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Power On and Connection:
• Power on the Motorola WAP4 so that it can be detected.
• Connect the Motorola WAP4 to the USB port of the desktop or laptop computer.
• Wait for the Windows Mobile Device Center Setup Wizard to appear and the status is
Connected.

396
Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application

Figure 12-25

3. Installing DT-508 application:

On the PC:
• On the CD, double click on file DT-508V*.*_Cab_Install.exe or file
Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• Select I Agree on the license if you agree to the License Agreement terms

Figure 12-26

397 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application 12

• Choose the DT-508 application and click Install

Figure 12-27

Figure 12-28

• If the SercelLaunch application has already been installed, you will be asked to reinstall
it. You may cancel this (answer No) if the version is the same.

Figure 12-29

• Wait for the installation to be completed on the PC

398
Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application

Figure 12-30

On the WAP4:
• Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-31

• Tap OK when the installation is finished

399 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application 12

Using .cab file and USB Storage Device

Prerequisites
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.
• File DT-508V*.*_WAP.cab

DT-508 Installation
1. Remove any previously installed DT-508 application.
On the WAP4:
• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs

Figure 12-32

• Select Sercel Deploy Tool 508 V*.*

400
Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application

Figure 12-33

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Copy the .cab file to an SD or USB storage device.
3. Ensure that the battery is present, and the device is in a powered docking station.
4. Insert the storage device.
5. Boot the device.
6. Using File Explorer, browse to the cab file on the storage media (Hard Disk).

401 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
DT-508 > Installing DT-508 Software application 12

Figure 12-34

7. Tap on the cab file.

8. Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-35

9. Tap OK when installation is finished

402
Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Overview

IT-508
Overview
The Sercel Inventory Tool 508 (IT-508) is an application used to assist in the management of
Sercel equipment. IT-508 is a software application that runs on a handheld PDA.
IT-508 software is able to connect to the 508-HCI Server to upload the inventory list. This
physical connection is made via Ethernet cabling.
Before installing IT-508 software, there is a one-time setup to install required drivers and
configure network settings.
Choose between method ‘Using PC and USB Connection (page 403)’ and
Installation ‘Using .cab file and USB Storage Device (page 407)’ for a one-time
installation and then see section Ethernet Configuration (page 385) for a one-time
configuration setup. Finally, choose between installation method Using PC and USB
Connection (page 403) or installation method Using .cab file and USB Storage
Device (page 407) to install the IT508 application.

Installing IT-508 Software Application

Using PC and USB Connection

Prerequisites
• File IT508V*.*_Cab_Install.exe or file Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.

Installation
1. Remove any previously installed IT508 application:
On the WAP4:
• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs

403 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application 12

• Select SERCEL Inventory Tool 508 V*.*

Figure 12-36

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Power On and Connection:
• Power on the Motorola WAP4 so that it can be detected.
• Connect the Motorola WAP4 to the USB port of the desktop or laptop computer.
• Wait for the Windows Mobile Device Center Setup Wizard to appear and the status is
Connected.

Figure 12-37

404
Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application

3. Installing IT508 application:

On the PC:
• On the CD, double click on file IT508V*.*_Cab_Install.exe or file
Sercel508_WAP4_InstallV*.*.exe
• Select I Agree on the license if you agree to the License Agreement terms

Figure 12-38

• Choose the IT508 application and click Install

Figure 12-39

Figure 12-40

• If the SercelLaunch application has already been installed, you will be asked to reinstall
it. You may cancel this (answer No) if the version is the same.

405 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application 12

Figure 12-41

• Wait for the installation to be completed on the PC

Figure 12-42

406
Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application

On the WAP4:
• Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-43

• Tap OK when the installation is finished

Using .cab file and USB Storage Device

Prerequisites
• A desktop or laptop PC with USB port (Windows 7 or higher) and Windows Mobile
Device Center installed.
• File IT508V*.*_WAP.cab

IT-508 Installation
1. Remove any previously installed IT-508 application.
On the WAP4:

407 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application 12

• Navigate to Settings > System tab > Remove Programs

Figure 12-44

• Select Sercel Inventory Tool 508 V*.*

Figure 12-45

• Remove and confirm

• OK to close
2. Copy the cab file to an SD or USB storage device.
3. Ensure that the battery is present, and the device is in a powered docking station.

408
Handheld-508 Software
IT-508 > Installing IT-508 Software Application

4. Insert the storage device.

5. Boot the device.
6. Using File Explorer, browse to the cab file on the storage media (Hard Disk).

Figure 12-46

7. Tap on the cab file.

8. Leave "Device" selected as the location, and tap Install

Figure 12-47

9. Tap OK when installation is finished.

409 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
Troubleshooting > Checking Ethernet Connection 12

Troubleshooting
Checking Ethernet Connection
To troubleshoot problems with the Ethernet connection:
• verify the physical connection between the WAP4 and HCI server
• verify the Ethernet Configuration (section Ethernet Configuration (page 385))
• verify that all settings are correct on the Settings > FTP tab screen (From the Main screen
tap Settings to go to the settings screen.).
• verify that the HCI server is configured to allow the IT-508 to login to it.

Checking RFID Reader

Start
The reading of RFID tags may be checked by running the RFIDTest program. To start this
program, first close (File > Exit) the IT-508 application. Then use File Explorer to navigate
to the My Device/Program Files/DT508 directory. (Note: the DT-508 application must be
installed.) Tap on RFIDTest.

Figure 12-48

410
Handheld-508 Software
Troubleshooting > Checking RFID Reader

Scan
Scan one or more tags at a time and see the results on the screen. Below is an example of
where five different tags were read at the same time. Note that the tag information may be
displayed in either its raw form or a decoded form.

Figure 12-49

411 February 6, 2020

 Handheld-508 Software
Troubleshooting > Tetra RT12 12

RFID Reader Information

Additional information about the RFID reader can be displayed by tapping on the Reader
Info button.

Figure 12-50

Additional Information
Additional information may be found in the Motorola Workabout Pro4 RFID Mobile
Computer Integrator Guide.

Tetra RT12
On Tetra RT12, on first start, SoftAP will report an error “AP did not start properly”. Reboot
the tablet and SoftAP will work properly.

412
Chapter

13 Field Tester FT-508

In this chapter:

• Overview (page 414)

• FT-508 Software Installation (page 415)

508XT Installation Manual 413

 Field Tester FT-508
Overview > 13

Overview
FT-508 is a software application, running on a PC tablet, dedicated for outdoor work to help
troubleshooters, Observers and Customer Support Engineers to test field units (FDU-508 or
DSU-508) deployed along the 508XT Line.

Figure 13-1 FT-508 on Tetra RT12 or U11i tablet

414
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > FT-508 Hardware

FT-508 Software Installation

FT-508 Hardware
For a complete description of the PC tablet, please see the section Tablet Computer
(page 73) in the chapter Hardware.

Installing FT-508 Application Software

IMPORTANT
Important information concerning installation:
• To complete installation of the FT-508 software, FT-508 software pre-installed on a USB
key (provided by Sercel) is required (ref.10047856).
• You must use the stylus pen to tap on the touch screen. Fingers are not recommended.
• To display the Virtual Keyboard, press at the bottom of the screen for 3-4 seconds, then
move up until the keyboard is displayed.

Figure 13-2 Virtual keyboard

CAUTION
Before starting installation ensure the FN button is switched Off.

415 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

Figure 13-3 FN button on RT12 tablet

Installation procedure
1. Switch Off the tablet by pressing the Power button for 5 seconds.
2. Plug the USB key in one of the USB ports at the bottom right-side of the tablet. 

3. Press the Power button and press Enter  every 2 seconds until the BIOS is
displayed.

416
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

Figure 13-4 Tablet BIOS

4. Press the Right Arrow  until the Save and Exit window is displayed.

Figure 13-5 Save and Exit window

417 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

5. Use the down arrow to select UEFI:<USB_KEY_NAME> in the Boot

Override and press ENTER . The tablet then boots on the USB key and the FT-
508 product install begins. This process is completely automatic.
6. When the following screen is displayed, just click on Enter.

Figure 13-6 Press Enter to see Installation menus

7. Select Install Sercel 508 Field Tester software on Tetra Tablet, when the screen
below is displayed.

Figure 13-7 Tetra Tablet selection

8. When the clock setup appears, Set the clock about 10 minutes before actual time.
In the Example below,
• Watch shows 16:30
• Tablet is set to 16:20

418
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

Click “Done” when time is set up.

Figure 13-8 Clock setup

9. The install process starts automatically.

419 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

You can see the install progress, as shown in the screenshot below.

Figure 13-9 Installation progress

Once the install process is finished, the tablet will reboot automatically.

420
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

10. The system will reboot automatically on your USB key. Remove the USB key and
restart the system by clicking on the button indicated below

Figure 13-10 Restart sequence

11. The tablet will restart and begin the second part of the installation.

Figure 13-11 FT-508 Application installation Splash Window

421 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

12. When the end of the installation is finished, the next window invites you to input a
valid FT-508 license. Press OK to validate the license key.

Figure 13-12 License Password

422
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

13. Continue by updating the software Patch Installations, for both server and client
software.

Figure 13-13 Server software patch installer

423 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

Figure 13-14 Client software patch installer

14. The FT-508 is now fully installed. 

Select Restart Computer in the System menus.

Figure 13-15 Restart Computer

424
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

IMPORTANT
The next steps are important to setup the clock of the tablet.

15. After restart check the clocks. The Tablet’s Clock must still show 10 minutes
discrepancy before the real Clock 
If not, right click on the Clock Icon, and select “Adjust Date and Time” 
Result: Time on tablet still 10 minutes before real time.
Note It ID necessary to enter the root Password (administrator) to finalize the setup.

16. Connect the Tablet to the 508 Server

Note Wait for the “Led” to turn green on FT-508 interface.

425 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software 13

17. Check the new time on the tablet Clock.

Figure 13-16 Tablet clock automatically setup by the CU-508

IMPORTANT
When you re-connect the Tablet to the CU-508, ensure that you wait 2 - 3 minutes
to allow clock synchronization to occur.

Local time (Time on watch) and clock on tablet show the same time.

426
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Installing FT-508 Application Software

18. Select Restart Computer in the System menus.

Figure 13-17 Restart Computer option

19. Check the time on the tablet Clock after the Tablet reboot.

Figure 13-18 Tablet clock and Date are up to date

427 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Hints and Tips 13

Hints and Tips

Restarting the System

To restart the system, just click on the button with the key icon and select “Restart Computer”
on the screen.

Figure 13-19

Do not use the button. This button only puts the tablet in standby mode in order to save
power. 
If the is pressed for 3 seconds, the power supply will be stopped. However, the
operating system has not been stopped properly, it could be corrupted and not restart
properly.

Set the tablet in standby mode

To save batteries, the tablet must be in standby mode when it’s not used.

To set the table in standby mode, just push briefly the button.

Figure 13-20

428
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Hints and Tips

Access to buttons on the border of the screen

Tactile screens of some tablets are sometime not calibrated properly. So, some button at the
bottom of the screen may not work properly. But, by clicking at the top of the icon, the button
will work.

Figure 13-21

429 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Starting the FT-508 aplication 13

Starting the FT-508 aplication

When the tablet is Started the FT-508 application is launched automatically. The procedure
below describes the steps, if you close the application and you wish to restart it. 

1. To start the FT-508 application, go to: 

/root/home/Sercel/com508/2.0/Client then double click on:
jStar.sh


2. Input the Login and Password 

Login: Observer
Password: pwd
and click on Connect.

Figure 13-22

3. Click the Field Tester 508 application icon:

Note If you don’t immediately see the following splash screen, restart the tablet and
retry to start the FT-508 application.

430
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > Starting the FT-508 aplication

Figure 13-23 FT-508 software Installation Splash screen

431 February 6, 2020

 Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > FT-508 Patcher software 13

FT-508 Patcher software

If you need to install software patches for the FT-508, you must launch the Sercel Client
Patcher then the Sercel Server Patcher. These can be found in:
/root/home/Sercel/com508/2.0/Client/patch/patcher
Then double click on patcher.sh
To install Server patches go to:
/root/home/Sercel/com508/2.0/Server/patch/bin
Then double-click on patcher.sh
The Patcher installation screen is displayed. Software patches must be installed in
incremental order.

Figure 13-24 Sercel Patcher installer

432
Field Tester FT-508
FT-508 Software Installation > FT-508 Patcher software

433 February 6, 2020

Chapter

14 508XT for Transition Zone

This chapter includes the following sections,

• Specific Handling Care (page 435)

• TZ Pack CX-508 (page 441)
• LINK-508XT-TZ (page 454)
• TZ TFOI-508 (page 468)
• TZ LRC-508 (page 481)
• TZ Energy Pack (page 485)

508XT Installation Manual 434

508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Personnel Protective Equipment

Specific Handling Care

Personnel Protective Equipment
Wear of Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) is required for operators during installation
and on the boat deck (cotton coverall, safety shoes, adequate gloves, protective
eyewear,…).
Working on a tensioned cable is potentially hazardous. Appropriate safety procedures should
be established for personnel working on tensioned cables. Safety guards should be put in
place to prevent personal injury in the event of cable breakage.

Boat Safety Devices

Flashing lights and emergency stop push buttons must be installed on the back-deck in
accessible and visible places.
Sercel recommends to use an efficient communication system (i.e. talkie-walkie) between
the boat driver and the deck organisation to deal with any event.
WARNING
These safety and communication devices should be tested periodically.

Storage
Equipment must be stored according to the following conditions:
• temperature: -40°C to +70°C
• relative humidity: 5 to 95%
Improper storage conditions can damage the equipment, leading to possible insulation
failure. Sercel recommends at least adding canopies/protection where possible.

System Assembly and Disassembly

The Sercel 508TZ system is designed to be used in the complete configuration. Equipment
must be completely installed as explained in this document.
The procedure for assembling/disassembling the components of the 508TZ system must be
carefully followed to avoid possible water ingress, current leakage or mechanical failure.
WARNING
The Sercel 508TZ system must not be deployed and retrieved without the complete
equipment (protection cages, stress relief system,…), especially if use up to 25m
water depth.

435 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Operational Condition Limits 14

Operational Condition Limits

The Sercel 508TZ system is designed for re-deployable seismic data acquisition in transition
zones. The Sercel 508TZ system consists of lightweight, flexible cable, and electronic
modules that operate to a depth of 15m, with the capability for use up to 25m maximum when
operated according to specific handling care and conditions in this operational model.
The cable and the mechanical components have been designed and tested to operate at the
pressure of the maximum operating depth, and to withstand the normal forces caused by
deployment and retrieval from this depth.
Each main operational parameter is given individually, and the Operational Model requires
each of them to be met for full compliance:

Operational Parameters Values

Operating Temperature (air) -5° C to 50° C
Operating Temperature (water) 0° C to 40° C
Sea state weather conditions Maximum: 4
Maximum: 2m with a wave period from 5 to 15
Wave height
seconds
Boat speed (deployment) Maximum: 3 knots (1,54m/s)
Boat speed (retrieval) Maximum: 1,5 knot (0.77m/s)
Relative pressure rating Maximum: 2.5 bars
Water depth Maximum: 25m with specific handling care (*)
Maximum: 30 days under 15m water depth
Deployment time under water
Maximum: 20 days under 25m water depth (*)
Linear tension on cable Typical up to 125 daN
Peak linear tension on cable Maximum: 300 daN
Note (*): refer to warning§ System Assembly and Disassembly (page 435)
for transition zone operations between 15m and 25m water depth.

Cable Storage on Back Deck

Links can be coiled on deck. This way of storing a cable can create cable kinking when the
cable is uncoiled. The cable storage area must be physically delimited, and personnel must
stay outside the area during deployment or retrieval. Personnel must be prevented from
stepping on the cables during the operations.

436
508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Line Deployment And Retrieval

Line Deployment And Retrieval

The 508TZ is designed for manual operations. This means the equipment must not be
deployed and retrieved using a winch, drum or LCE (linear cable engine) powered by
electrical, hydraulic or pneumatic energy.
Sercel recommends to deploy and retrieve material from the front of the boat, in order to
facilitate the operations keeping the line in the same direction as the boat displacement. It is
recommended to equip the edge boat with a chute (Overboarding device - refer to
next page for recommended definition and dimensions).

Figure 14-25 Example of chute to facilitate equipment deployment and retrieve

437 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Line Deployment And Retrieval 14

Overboarding device
Sercel recommended design of chute (overboarding device):

Figure 14-26 Overboarding device example 1 of 2

438
508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Line Deployment And Retrieval

Figure 14-27 Overboarding device example 2 of 2

The speed of the vessel should be controlled as much as possible to match the equipment
recovery speed to ensure that the cable is not dragging across the bottom. The peak cable
tension must never exceed the maximum specified value.
Cable deployment normally applies low steady-state loads to the cable, except when starting
and stopping.
Loads are higher during the cable retrieval operation. Drag due to the retrieval speed, waves
and sea current actions can induce peak loads on the cable. In any case, the speed for recovery
must be adapted in such a way to avoid any negative cable departure angle (see picture
below).

439 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
Specific Handling Care > Sensor Connection 14

Figure 14-28 Typical deployment illustration

Sensor Connection
Sercel recommends using sensor connectors equipped with locking rings for TZ applications
to avoid unexpected disconnections.

440
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Overview

TZ Pack CX-508
This procedure explains how to install TZ PACK CX-508 unit.

Overview

441 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Tools 14

Tools
In order to prepare the installation of TZ PACK CX-508, Sercel recommends to use torque-
controlled tools. The table below provides recommended tools:

Note These tools are not included with the TZ PACK CX-508 and not provided by
Sercel.

442
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

Cage Installation

CAGE TZ CX-508 includes also the followings list of screws, nut and washers:

443 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation 14

Step 1: Strap Removal

• Start by removing the two U-shaped buttons on each side of the strap:

444
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

• Pull the strap edge out as follows:

• Now that the edge is free, pull it all the way out of the CX-508.

The TZ CX-508 unit is now ready to be put in place in the cage assembly.

445 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation 14

Step 2: Cage Assembly

• Insert both HORIZONTAL FRAMES of the cage in one VERTICAL FRAME (see
below).

WARNING
The hook shaped areas pointed in orange should be on the outside of the cage.

446
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

• Use tools to fix parts in together (refer to section Tools (page 442))
Use 4 SCREWS CHC M8x25, 4 NUT "NYLSTOP" M8 and 8 WASHER Ø8.

IMPORTANT
At this stage, it is recommended to not tighten screws completely.
Keep about 1mm free space in the assembly.

447 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation 14

• Rotate the cage and insert the TZ CX-508 as shown:

448
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

IMPORTANT
Make sure bumpers of TZ CX-508 are in contact with tubes on both sides.

• Put the last VERTICAL FRAME of the cage using the HORIZONTAL FRAMES as a
guide.

WARNING
The hook shape areas pointed in orange should be on the outside of the cage.

449 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation 14

• Screw this VERTICAL FRAME with the 2 HORINZONTAL FRAMES as explained for
the first VERTICAL FRAME

At this stage, tighten the 8 screws using the torque wrench set up at at 18Nm.

Step 3: Side Flanges Assembly

• Use tools to fix the 8 x SIDE FLANGES on the structure of the cage. (refer to section
Tools (page 442)
• Use 16 SCREW CHC M6x35; 16 NUT "NYLSTOP" M6; 16 WASHER Ø6 and 32
SADDLE WASHERS.
• Tighten the 16 screws using the torque wrench set up at 7Nm

450
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

• The final assembly should be as follows:

451 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation 14

Step 4: Sacrificial Anodes Assembly

In order to prevent the product from corrosion, Sercel recommends to install sacrificial
anodes on the top of the frame assembly:

• Use tools to fix the 2 x SACRIFICIAL ANODES (refer to section Tools (page 442))
• Use 4 SCREW CHC M6x16; 4 NUT "NYLSTOP" M6; 4 WASHER Ø6

452
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Pack CX-508 > Cage Installation

• Tighten the 4 screws using the torque wrench set up at 7Nm

Step 5: Sling Installation

• Pass the SLING into the 4 hooks and join the extremities using a SNAP HOOK

453 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Overview 14

LINK-508XT-TZ
This procedure explains how to install LINK-508XT-TZ.

Overview
The LINK-508XT-TZ is defined by several parameters:
• the number of FDUs by LINK
• the intermediate distance D between two FDUs
• the type of sensor (mono or dual sensor)
The dual sensor uses the FDUs by pairs (the two FDUs of a pair are separated by a distance
d), reducing the length of the LINK-508XT-TZ.
The following pictures shows both example of LINK-508XT-TZ mono or dual sensor with
4 FDUs by line:

Mono-sensor: LINK-508XT-FDU-4-TZ-“D”M

Dual-sensor: LINK-508XT-FDU-4-TZ-“D-3”M-3M

Example: LINK-508XT-FDU-4-TZ-52M-3M for an intermediate distance of 55m between

2 Receiver Points.

454
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Tools

For dual-sensor applications, Sercel recommends to intertwine the dual-sensor cable with the
TZ LINK-508 cable in order to limit unwanted buckles between the two cables. Use of
DUCT TAPE and CABLE TIES is also recommended (not supplied with TZ LINK-508).
Schematic display of dual-sensor installation is shown below:

Tie Wrap

Figure 14-29 Dual sensor installation example

Tools
No tools are required to install links, everything can be done manually.

455 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508 14

Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508

External seal

IMPORTANT
The presence of the external seal on every LINK connector is mandatory for
waterproof reliability. 
Spares parts of external seal are available in TZ PACK CX-508.

456
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508

In case the external seal is missing or must be replaced, the procedure is as follows:
• Locate the EXTERNAL SEAL as follows, the smaller holes should be facing the male
plug shapes.

457 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508 14

• Make sure the small rectangular rib is facing the plug and is oriented as follows:

LINKs connection
• Take the two connectors and plug them (STEP1), then rotate both in opposite directions
(STEP2) until the movement is blocked and both CHANDLERY FLANGE can be closed
fully.

458
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508

• Once done, the result is as shown.

• Block the CHANDLERY FLANGE using the PINS as shown below.

• For LINK disconnection, follow same instructions in opposite way

459 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508 14

Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508

To connect TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508, the JUMPER TZ CX-508 to LINKS TZ (ref.
10044621) is needed (delivered with TZ PACK-508).

This part aims to show how to connect the JUMPER to the TZ CX-508 cage:
• Mark a point on the cable at 110+/- 2 cm of the jumper plug:

460
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508

• Start to insert the cable into the EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM (orange color
– delivered with TZ PACK CX-508) starting by the mark point.

• Make 3 turns clockwise before letting the wire out on the other side of the reel

461 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508 14

• Close the reel EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM by screwing its cap.

• Final montage should appear like this:

462
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508

• For installation on TZ CX-508, pass the stainless steel wire in its hole and connect plug
on the CX-508.

• Use the snap hook to hold the two sides of the stainless steel wire together.
CAUTION
The wire should not be trapped around any element of the cage to avoid it being
damaged.

463 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > Connection: TZ LINK-508 to LAND LINK-508 14

In case the TZ CX-508 is not paired with a JUMPER TZ CX-508 to LINKS TZ on one of its
sides, meaning it is placed in the end of a line, please connect an END-OF-LINE
CONNECTOR (provided in TZ PACK CX-508) on the plug instead of the JUMPER.

Connection: TZ LINK-508 to LAND LINK-508

In case TZ LINK-508 has to be connected to LAND LINK-508, a CABLE INTERFACE
508XT LAND/TZ 5M is recommended (not included in any TZ PACK, part is supplied
separately, ref. 10044621) to avoid having to manage a TZ CX-508 in between.

464
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > TZ LINK-508 CONNECTOR MAINTENANCE

Connect the TZ LINK-508 side to a TZ LINK-508 following the instructions described in

Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ LINK-508 (page 456), and the LAND LINK-508
side to a LAND LINK-508 as follows:

TZ LINK-508 CONNECTOR MAINTENANCE

Plugs Cleaning
This procedure provides the recommended procedure for every connection to prevent fouling
of the connectors of TZ LINK-508. In cases where local constraints don’t allow applying this
procedure before each connection, the user has to define the most suitable frequency to
guarantee connection quality.
Please note that chemicals products such as soap or alcohol must not be used.
1. Soaking
A soft (nylon, NON METALLIC) brush can be used to clean the outside part of the plug. It
must NOT be used to clean the inside of connector (when disassembly). Drown each pair of
connectors in clear water, preferably warm and not calcareous, and shake them during a few
seconds.

2. Cleaning
Spray the plugs with clean water using a spray, and move the connector to remove excess
water.

465 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > TZ LINK-508 CONNECTOR MAINTENANCE 14

Dry the connectors with either compressed air holding the nozzle at least 15cm of the plug,
or a dry air spray with a refillable aerosol (JELT 6903 - GAZ SEC ODP “O” or equivalent).
3. Connection
Plug in connectors referring to the appropriate section. If a problem appears, clean again the
connector.

466
508XT for Transition Zone
LINK-508XT-TZ > TZ LINK-508 CONNECTOR MAINTENANCE

FDU PLug Lubricating

This procedure provides the steps to take ideally before every connection to prevent fouling
of the connectors of TZ LINK-508 FDU PLUG (see below). In cases where local constraints
don’t allow applying this procedure before each connection, it is the user to define the most
suitable frequency so that contacts are kept clean.

Pass a clean and dry rag on the circled area first, then lubricate using silicone (RHODORSIL
AEROSOL SIL JET or equivalent). Check a silicone film deposit on the whole area and
place the cap once lubricating is finished.

467 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Overview 14

TZ TFOI-508
This procedure explains how to install TZ TFOI-508 unit.

Overview
Due to the environment it operates in, the TZ TFOI-508 requires a particular installation in
order to secure optical fiber cable, especially during manual installation/retrieving.
The pack is composed of the following elements:

468
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Tools

Tools
Table below is an example of recommended tools:

Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508

In a TZ TFOI-508, both sides can be used to connect a TZ CX-508

469 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508 14

This part aims to show how to connect the TZ TFOI-508 to the TZ CX-508 cage:
• Mark a point on the cable at 115 +/- 2 cm of the jumper plug

470
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508

• Start to insert the cable into the EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM (black color)
starting by the mark point.

471 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508 14

• Make 3 turns clockwise before letting the wire out on the other side of the reel

• Close the reel EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM by screwing its cap.

472
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508

• Final montage should appear like this:

473 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Connection: TZ TFOI-508 to TZ CX-508 14

• For installation on TZ CX-508, pass the stainless steel wire in its hole and connect plug
on the CX-508

• Use the snap hook to hold the two sides of the stainless steel wire together.
CAUTION
The wire should not be trapped around any element of the cage to avoid it being
damaged.

474
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation

Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation

Overview
Final assembly of TZ TFOI-508 between two TZ CX-508 should appear like picture below.
Both sides of TZ TFOI-508 have to be plugged according to “connection TZ TFOI-508 to
TZ CX-508” paragraph.
Once this is done, please follow the next 3 steps to proceed:

CAUTION
Make sure, when making the first as well as the last attachments between the
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE and the OPTIC FIBER, that the optic fiber is loose so
the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE will support mechanical constraints.

475 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation 14

Step 1
• Using a SNAP HOOK, attach the looped extremity of the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
to the TZ CX-508 SLING

• Using the DUCT TAPE, attach the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE to OPTICAL FIBER
CABLE making sure the OPTICAL FIBER CABLE is loose. DUCT TAPE length cut is
about 13cm in order to make 3 turns around both cables.

476
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation

Step 2
• Unwind both cables together, keep them attached using Duct Tape every 1m

477 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation 14

Step 3
• When attaching to the other extremity of the TZ TFOI-508, use the remaining length of
the STAINLESS STEAL CABLE and make a loop around the STAINLESS STEEL
CABLE of the TZ CX-508, while the TZ TFOI-508 remains stretched

• Give some slack to the TZ TFOI-508 optical fiber cable by pulling the TZ CX-508. Keep
the LOAD side of the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE stretched by pulling the DEAD
LINE. Then repeat STEP 1 on this side, attaching the LOAD side of the INOX CABLE
with the OPTICAL FIBER CABLE with DUCT TAPE.

478
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation

• Close the loop using a CABLE CLAMP between the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
LOAD and DEAD STAND sides, and tighten its screws using the metric angled wrench.
The loop formed should be around 10cm diameter.

• Make sure that when you pull the LOAD side of the STAINLESS STEEL CABLE, the
TZ TFOI-508 optical fiber cable remains loose. Then place two other CABLE CLAMPS
spaced by 50cm each between the DEAD LINE and the LOAD sides and screw them.

479 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ TFOI-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation 14

• Final montage should be as follows. Additional DUCT tape can be added around CABLE
CLAMP as a protection against manual handling

480
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ LRC-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation

TZ LRC-508
This procedure explains how to install TZ LRC-508 unit.
The TZ PACK LRC-508 is composed of the following elements:

Note that for Transition Zones applications, the LRC should be put on a buoy with a central
metallic mast, which is not included in this pack.

481 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ LRC-508 > Optical Fiber – Stress Relief Installation 14

Figure 14-30 TZ LRC-508 deployment example

482
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ LRC-508 > Tools

Tools
No tools are required to install TZ LRC-508.

LRC-508 Box Installation

• Connect the LRC-BOX to the LRC EXTERNAL CABLE.

• Connect the LRC EXTERNAL CABLE to the EXTENSION CABLE LRC-CX

• Pass the wire of the EXTENSION CABLE LRC-CX in the EXTERNAL STRESS
RELIEF SYSTEM ORANGE (see paragraph Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-
508 (page 460) to install the EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM (orange color)
properly) and anchor it to the floater using a SLING.

483 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ LRC-508 > LRC-508 Box Installation 14

• Install the EXTERNAL STRESS RELIEF SYSTEM (orange color) on the TZ CX-508
side (refer to paragraph Connection: TZ LINK-508 to TZ CX-508 (page 460))
• Plug the EXTENSION CABLE LRC-CX in the CX-508.
Note You might consider anchoring the TZ CX-508 to the TZ LRC-508 using a rope.

484
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Overview

TZ Energy Pack
This procedure explains how to install TZ ENERGY PACK 182Ah units. Note that this
procedure can be followed for TZ ENERGY PACK 364Ah units as well.

Overview
The TZ ENERGY PACK 182Ah is composed of the following elements:

485 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Tools 14

Tools
In order to prepare the installation of TZ ENERGY PACK 182Ah, Sercel recommends the
use of torque-controlled tools. Table below is an example of recommended tools:

486
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation

Note These tools are not included with the TZ ENERGY PACK 182Ah and not
provided by Sercel.

Cage Installation

487 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation 14

CAGE CX-508TZ includes also the followings list of screws, nut and washers:

Item name Number Picture Use

16
SCREW CHC M6x30 STOP BLOCK ASSEMBLY
+ 2 spares

4 SIDE FLANGES
SCREW CHC M6x35
+ 2 spares ASSEMBLY

16
SCREW CHC M8x25 FRAMES ASSEMBLY
+ 2 spares

SIDE FLANGES
20
NUT "NYLSTOP" M6 ASSEMBLY + STOP
+ 2 spares
BLOCK ASSEMBLY

16
NUT "NYLSTOP" M8 FRAMES ASSEMBLY
+ 2 spares

SIDE FLANGES
SADDLE WASHERS 24 ASSEMBLY + STOP
BLOCK ASSEMBLY

32
WASHER Ø8 FRAMES ASSEMBLY
+ 4 spares

SIDE FLANGES
WASHER Ø6 4
ASSEMBLY

WASHER OND. Ø6 32 STOP BLOCK ASSEMBLY

488
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation

Step 1: Stop Block Assembly On Vertical Frames

• Use tools to fix 2 x STOP BLOCKS on each VERTICAL FRAME in the areas circled in
red. (refer to section Tools (page 486)).Tools

• Use 8 SCREW CHC M6x30; 8 NUT "NYLSTOP" M6; 16 WASHER OND. Ø6 and 8
SADDLE WASHERS.

489 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation 14

• Tighten the 8 screws using the torque wrench set up at 7Nm.

490
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation

Step 2: Stop Block Assembly On Horizontal Frames

• Use tools to fix 4 x STOP BLOCKS on each HORIZONTAL FRAME. (refer to section
ToolsTools (page 486)).
• Use 8 SCREW CHC M6x30; 8 NUT "NYLSTOP" M6; 16 WASHER OND. Ø6 and 8
SADDLE WASHERS.
• Tighten the 8 screws using the torque wrench set up at 7Nm.

491 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation 14

Step 3: Cage Assembly

• Insert all VERTICAL FRAMES in one of the HORIZONTAL FRAMES, making sure all
STOP BLOCKS are facing the inside of the cage (see below).
• Use tools to fix parts in together (refer to sectionTools (page 486)).
• Use 8 SCREW CHC M8x25, 8 NUT "NYLSTOP" M8 and 16 WASHER Ø8. Do not
tighten screws completely

492
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation

• Insert the battery down as follows

• Put the last HORIZONTAL FRAME on position, then screw it to the VERTICAL
FRAMES the same way as the first HORIZONTAL FRAME

493 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation 14

• At this stage, tighten all screws using the torque wrench set up at 18Nm.

494
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation

Step 4: Side Flanges Assembly

• Use tools to fix the two SIDE FLANGES on the structure of the cage. (refer to section
ToolsTools (page 486)).
• Use 4 SCREW CHC M6x35; 4 NUT "NYLSTOP" M6; 4 WASHER Ø6 and 8 SADDLE
WASHERS.

495 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Cage Installation 14

• Final assembly should appear like this

496
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Connection to TZ CX-508

Connection to TZ CX-508
• Put both TZ CX-508 and ENERGY UNIT in their CAGES side by side as follows

497 February 6, 2020

 508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Connection to TZ CX-508 14

• Pass two SLINGS in the TZ CX-508 CAGE as follows. Make sure the two SLINGS are
crossed under the TZ CX-508 (see below).

Figure 14-31 TZ CX-508 (side view)

Figure 14-32 TZ CX-508 (bottom view)

498
508XT for Transition Zone
TZ Energy Pack > Connection to TZ CX-508

• On each side of the SLINGS, make a loop around the closest HORIZONTAL FRAME
(see below for an example).

• Connect the ENERGY UNIT 182Ah to the TZ CX-508 using the CABLE CX –
ENERGY UNIT.

WARNING
Make sure when pulling the two cages apart that the CABLE CX – ENERGY UNIT
is always loose and never under tension. The SLINGS should be taking all stresses.

499 February 6, 2020

Chapter

15 Field Equipment
Specifications

This chapter describes the technical specifications of field

equipment. It includes the following sections:

• Land & Marsh Equipment (page 501)

508XT Installation Manual 500

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > FDU-508 & TZ FDU-508 Specifications

Land & Marsh Equipment

FDU-508 & TZ FDU-508 Specifications
FDU-508 TZ FDU-508
• Data filtering, compression & time stamping
• Data transmission with CRC control
Functions
• 24 bits A/D conversion
• Instrument and sensor tests
Sample Rate 4, 2, 1, 0.5ms
Time Standard Synchronous to GPS clock
Full Scale 1.6 V RMS (0dB), 400 mV RMS (12dB)
Noise (3-200Hz) 450 nV RMS (0dB), 145nV RMS (12dB)
Instant Dynamic
130 dB
Range
System Dynamic
140 dB
Range
Distortion -110dB
Power Consumption 105 mW in acquisition
Operating
-40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
Temperature
Operation
Onshore operations Transition Zone / Offshore
Conditions
Weight 0.470 kg / 1.04 lbs 1.235 kg / 2.20 lbs
Dimensions
86.2x 76 x 248 mm (3.4 x3.0x9.7 in.) 125 x 76 x 400 mm (4.9 x3.0x15.8 in.)
(HxWxD)
Waterproofness Up to 5 m Up to 25m(1)
(1) with specific handling care above 15m

501 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > FDU-508 & TZ FDU-508 Specifications 15

Figure 15-1 FDU-508

FDU-508 Dimensions

76
248
86,2

Figure 15-2 FDU-508 dimensions

502
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > DSU1-508 Specifications

DSU1-508 Specifications
DSU1-508 Specifications (Typical at 25°C)
• Data filtering, compression & time stamping
• Data transmission with CRC control
Functions
• Acceleration measurement
• Instrument and sensor tests
Sample Rate 4, 2, 1, 0.5ms
Time Standard Synchronous to GPS clock
Bandwidth 0-800Hz
Full Scale 5m/s2
Noise 15ng/√Hz
System Dynamic Range 140dB
Distortion -90dB
Power Consumption 85mW in acquisition, 50mW in standby
Weight 0.485kg / 1.07 lbs
Operating Temperature -40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
Operation Conditions For onshore operations / Waterproof down to 5 m

Figure 15-3 DSU1-508

503 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > DSU1-508 Specifications 15

DSU1-508 Dimensions

58
176,8

248

76,4

Figure 15-4 DSU1-508 Dimensions

504
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > CX-508 & TZ CX-508Specifications

CX-508 & TZ CX-508Specifications

CX-508 TZ CX-508
• Supply clock and power to connected FDU-508/DSU1-508
Functions • Store data locally and transmit data to CU via network
• Transmit data to CU via network with error recovery
Operating
10.5 -15V DC
Voltage
Line Data Rate 10 - 20 - 40 Mbps
Maximum
number of 2,400 @2ms real-time
channels per line
Transverse data
1 Gbps
rate
Maximum
number of
100,000 @2ms real-time
channels per
transverse
Power • Line only: 3W in acquisition, 1W in standby
consumption • With transverse: 7W in acquisition, 2W in standby
Operating
-40°C to 70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
Temperature
Weight 3.8kg / 8.38 lbs 11 kg / 24.25 lbs with cage
Operation
Onshore Transition Zone / Offshore
Conditions
Waterproofness Up to 15 m Up to 25 m

505 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > CX-508 & TZ CX-508Specifications 15

Figure 15-5 CX-508

506
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > CX-508 & TZ CX-508Specifications

CX-508 Dimensions
342,4

A
158
218

Figure 15-6 CX-508 Dimensions

507 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > Transverse Fibre Optics extender TFOI-508 & TZ TFOI -508 15

Transverse Fibre Optics extender TFOI-508 & TZ TFOI -508

TFOI-508 TZ TFOI-508
Operation Type Onshore Transition Zone / Offshore
Maximum length 2 km 2 km
Weight 45 kg/km 140 kg/km (1)
Breaking Strength bulk cable 300 daN 300 daN
Breaking Strength with connectors 170 daN 300 daN(1)
Waterproofness Up to 15 m Up to 25m (2)
(1) with Stainless steel cable
(2) with specific handling care above 15m

The fibre optics extender (TFOI) is available in different lengths up to 10 km.

Figure 15-7 TFOI-508

508
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > Line Cable

Line Cable
Land cable TZ cable
Operation Type Onshore Transition Zone / Offshore
Maximum length - -
Weight 43 kg/km 83 kg/km
Breaking Strength bulk cable 150 daN 350 daN
Breaking Strength with connectors 120 daN 300 daN
Waterproofness Up to 5 m Up to 25m (1)
(1) with specific handling care above 15 m

509 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications 15

WTU-508 Specifications
General
• Data filtering, compression & time
Acquisition stamping
• 24 bits A/D conversion
Sensor tests Resistance, tilt, noise
Instrument tests Noise, gain, phase, distortion
Memory autonomy (24hr op, 2ms
1400hr
sampling)
Battery autonomy (Autonomous mode) 720hr
External voltage input 11VDC – 16.8VDC
Weight 2.1Kg
Dimension (HxWxD) 160x159x342mm

Environmental limits
Operational temperature -40°C to +60°C(with internal battery)a
Storage temperature -40°C to +60°C
Recommended Storage temperature +25°C
Ingress protection IP68 to 1m submersion
Battery charge temperature 0°C to +40°C

Radio transmission (XT-Pathfinder)

Frequency band 2405MHz – 2470MHz
Spreading method FHSS
Data rate 100kbps
Range 100m nominal LOS

Radio transmission (WiFi)

WLAN Frequency band a, b, g ,n
Data payload 15Mbps (a, g)
Range 800m nominal (2.4GHz band) LOS

510
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications

GNSS
Supported constellations GPS L1 C/A, GLONASS, GALILEO
Cold start acquisition sensitivity -148dBm

Sensor
Sample rate 4, 2, 1, 0.5ms
Timing accuracy <20us
Input impedance differential mode 20kΩ // 77nF
Full scale 1.6V RMS (0dB), 400mV RMS (12dB)
Noise (3-200Hz) 450nV RMS (0dB), 145nV RMS (12dB)
Instant dynamic range 130dB
System dynamic range 140dB
Distortion -110dB
Gain accuracy < 0.1%
Selectable :
Low cut filter (None, 0.15625 Hz, 0.3125 Hz, 0.625 Hz,
1.25 Hz, 2.5 Hz)
High cut filter 0.8FN linear or minimum phase
a. External battery option

511 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications 15

Figure 15-8 WTU-508

512
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications

Figure 15-9 WTU-508 dimensions

513 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications 15

WTU Regulatory information

United States:
The FCC ID of the WTU-508 is KQ9-0500A
The WTU-508 contains FCC ID: KQ9-W161A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
16. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. The equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help

WARNING
The device must be professionally installed.

WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Sercel could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.

WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC’s radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment under the following conditions :

514
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications

This equipment should be installed and operated such that a minimum separation distance of
20 cm is maintained between the radiator (antenna) and user’s/nearby person’s body at all
times.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other.

CANADA:
The IC ID of the WTU-508 is 1317A-0500A
CAN ICES-3 (A) / NMB-3(A)
The WTU-508 contains IC ID: 1317A-W161A
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
17. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage ;
18. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 1 cm between
the radiator and your body.
Cet équipement devra être installé et actionné avec la distance minimum de 1 cm entre
l’élément rayonnant et votre corps.
Europe:
Conforms to the essential requirements of the following EEC directives:
R&TTE 1999/5/CE
EMC 2004/108/CE
LV 2006/95/CE
WARNING
The WTU-508 is a class-A device. In residential areas, the user may be requested to
take appropriate measures in the event of RF interference caused by this device.

515 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > WTU-508 Specifications 15

WARNING
The WTU-508 meets the reference level set by the 1999/519/CE recommendation:
Electric field strength in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as
follows:
30 + P + G
E = ------------------------------
d
With: 
E = Electric filed in V/m
P = Maximum average transmit power capability of the radio, in W
G = total Tx gain as a factor, converted from dB
d = distance from the point source, in m (

Band P*G E at 20cm E limit (1)

WLAN 2.4GHz emission only (2) 0.08W (+19dBm) 7.7V/m 61V/m

0.02W (+13dBm)
Proprietary radio 2.4GHz emission
+ 0.032W 6.2V/m 61V/m
+ WLAN 5GHz emission
(+15dBm)
1. reference level of the table 2 of the 1999/519/CE
2. WLAN 2.4GHz emission and proprietary radio 2.4GHz emission cannot happen
simultaneously

516
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > PFT Specifications

PFT Specifications
PFT Specifications
Manufacturer Zebra Technologies
Model Workabout PRO 4
Dimensions 223mm x 75/100mm x 31/42mm
Weight 526g
3.7in VGA/QVGA (640x480); Transflectve colour touch display
Display
Sunlight visibility with 240 cd/m2
Keyboard Alphanumeric
Expansion Ports Micro SD slot; dedicated USB port; audio port; Scanner interface
Battery High capacity 440mAh or Standard capacity 2760mAh
CPU Sitara™ AM37x ARM Cortex™ -A8 1GHz processor
Memory 512MB RAM; 4GB Flash
Operating
Microsoft Windows Embedded CE6.0
System
Frequency: 13.56MHz; Supports ISO14443 type A, B and C protocols;NFC
RFID
Reader to Tag Mode; full Mifare support
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
802.11a – up to 54Mbps
Wireless 802.11 b/g – up to 54Mbps
802.11n @ 2.4GHz – up to 72.2 Mbps
802.11n @ 5GHz – up to 72.2 Mbps
WEP (40 or 104 bit); WPA/WPA2 Personal;
WPA/WPA2 Enterprise –EAP-TTLS (PAP, MSCHAP, MSCHAPv2), EAP-
Wireless Security
TLS, PEAPv0- MSCHAPv2, PEAPv1-EAP-GTC, EAP-FAST, TKIP, AES;
Wi-Fi CCXv4 certified
Integrated Bluetooth v2.1+EDR
Bluetooth
Bluetooth coexistence (v2.1)
GPS Optional GPS/Wi-Fi diversity antenna module (supports AGPS and SBAS)
Operating Temp -30°C to +60°C (-20°C cold start)
Storage Temp -50°C to +70°C
Humidity 3% to 95% non-condensing

517 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > PFT Specifications 15

Ingress
IP65, IEC60529
Protection
1.5m, 26 drops to polished concrete (powered with options and accessories)
Shock
Multiple 1.8m drops to polished concrete
ESD ± 8kV contact, ± 15kV air discharge

518
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > Data Harvester Specifications

Data Harvester Specifications

Data
Specifications
Harvester
Manufacturer Xplore Technologies
Model iX104C5
Dimensions 284.4mm x 209.5 mm x 40.7mm
Weight 2.3Kg
10.4" XGA (1024x768) rugged LED backlit display with Dual-mode
AllVue™ Xtreme technology for enhanced outdoor sunlight readability.
Display Resistive finger touch and active pen inputs.
Contrast ratio = 600:1 (typical), wide viewing cone up to 1600, Automatic
Light Sensor (ALS), NVIS compatible (low/high settings)
External Power Autosensing adapter 100-240V, 50-60 Hz supplying 19VDC
10-cell high-capacity “Smart” Li-Ion removable battery (68.5 Whr), up to
6.5 hrs battery life.
Battery
6-cell bridge battery supports warm-swap battery operation
(suspend-to-RAM only)
Intel® Core™ i7, 620 UE processor with Turbo Boost Technology (up to
CPU
2.13 Ghz) (1.06 GHz / 800-1067 MHz FSB / 4 MB L2 Smart Cache)
Memory 4 GB Dual-Channel DDR3 memory
Disk 2 x 80GB SSD removable drives
Operating
Ubuntu
System
Wireless Internal card: Gigabyte or Sparklan
Operating Temp -20°C to +50°C
Storage Temp -40°C to +60°C
Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Ingress
IP65, IEC60529
Protection
Emissions FCC Part 15, CE Mark EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B
Immunity EN55024
UL60950, EN60950, ATEX/IECEx Zone 2/Category 3 Compliant, UL 1604
Safety
(ISA Std 12.12-CSA Std C 22.1) Class I/Division II (Z:A-D) certified

519 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > Charger Offloader WTU-508 Specifications 15

Charger Offloader WTU-508 Specifications

Charger
Specifications
Offloader
WTU-508 Ports 10 x 100Mb/s
Ethernet Ports 2x 1Gb/s
Input Voltage 115 / 230VAC
Charge Voltage 12VDC / 2.5A
Operating Temp. -20°C / +50°C
Storage Temp. -30°C / +70°C
Certifications UL & CE

APU Specifications
APU Specifications
Manufacturer Mikrotik
Model RBMetalG-52SHPacn
Max Power consumption 11W
PoE in Passive PoE
PoE in input Voltage 10-30 V
Number of DC inputs 1 (PoE-IN)
Wireless 5 GHz/2.4 GHz standards 802.11a/b/g/n/ac
Antenna gain dBi for 5 GHz/2.4 GHz 6
Ethernet-Link 1 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet port
Operating Temp ...
Storage Temp ...

520
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > LRC-508 & TZ LRC-508 Specifications

LRC-508 & TZ LRC-508 Specifications

LRC-508 Specifications
Without Antenna: 160x150x90mm
Dimensions
Antenna Length: 470mm
Without antenna and cable: 0.860 kg
Weight
With antenna and 2m cable: 1.920 kg
-Continuous transmission at full power: 2W (autonomous
part of the spread)
-Reception mode: 0.4W (connected part of the spread)
Power Consumption
-Sleep mode: 0.2W
-LRC is powered by CX. No additional external power
source is needed
Operating temperature range -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
Storage temperature range -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)
- 1m for housing and antenna, up to 5m for the XDP plug on
Waterproofness CX-508
- IP68
- Antenna: N 50 ohms female coaxial connector
Connectics
- CX-508: Sercel specific 10-pins connector for XDP plug
- Bandwidth: 2405-2469 MHz
Radiocommunication
- Data rate: 1.2 kbps
LRC-508: Onshore
Operating Conditions
TZ LRC-508: Offshore on a buoy

Figure 15-10 LRC-508

521 February 6, 2020

 Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > LRC-508 & TZ LRC-508 Specifications 15

Figure 15-11 LRC-508 dimensions

522
Field Equipment Specifications
Land & Marsh Equipment > LRC-508 & TZ LRC-508 Specifications

523 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

12
Alias filter
· Frequency at - 3dB point (SEGD)
Index DFM: 119
· Slope (SEGD) DFM: 120
Angle from skew (SPS) DFM: 10,
DFM: 20, DFM: 50, DFM: 61
508XT manuals Archive
IM = Installation Manual · PFT lists FM2: 288
Array
FM1 = Functional Manual Vol. 1 · Forming (SEGD) DFM: 121
Arrays, sub, number of DFM: 25,
FM2 = Functional Manual Vol. 2
DFM: 66
DFM = Data Format Manual Assembly
· Location (SEGD) DFM: 142
A · Serial number (SEGD) DFM: 142
· Type (SEGD) DFM: 142
Abbreviations FM2: 334
Assign Markers
Absolute · from PFT list FM2: 287
· Spread, tests FM1: 87
Assigning boxes to stakes FM2: 178
Acquisition
Auto
· Error description (SEGD)
· Export FM2: 216
DFM: 128
· Length (SEGD) DFM: 122
Auto-assignment FM2: 178
· Number (SEGD) DFM: 127 Auto-check
· parameters FM2: 76 · GPS and SPS FM2: 183
Acquisition type tables (SEGD) · GPS, no SPS FM2: 186
· WTU assignment to RP
DFM: 127
FM2: 183
Additional
Autocorrelation peak time (SEGD)
· blocks (SEGD general header)
DFM: 113 DFM: 127
AGC FM1: 433 Automation
· Continuous, shooting FM1: 181
Aided assignment FM2: 116
· Discontinuous, shooting
Air FM1: 181
· gun (SPS) DFM: 14, DFM: 54 · Manual, shooting FM1: 181
· pressure psi (SPS) DFM: 25,
Auto-processing FM2: 60
DFM: 66

364
Index
>

Aux · error (SEGD) DFM: 140

· Channel contents (SPS) · high limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
DFM: 11, DFM: 22, · low limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
DFM: 51, DFM: 63 · value (SEGD) DFM: 140
· Traces, number of DFM: 122 Channel
Auxiliary · data error overscaling (SEGD)
· channels, deploying IM: 300 DFM: 146
· edited status (SEGD) DFM: 146
· filter (SEGD) DFM: 145
B · gain control method (SEGD)
Base scan interval (SEGD) DFM: 119
DFM: 114 · gain scale (SEGD) DFM: 145
Beginner FM2: 13 · increment (SPS) DFM: 16,
BIT DFM: 29, DFM: 57,
· generate VPs FM2: 50 DFM: 70
Blaster · number (SEGD) DFM: 142
· id (SEGD) DFM: 124 · process (SEGD) DFM: 147
· status (SEGD) DFM: 125 · sample to mV conversion factor
Blocking (SEGD) DFM: 146
· trace FM2: 212 · Set End Time (SEGD) DFM: 118
Blocks in General Trailer · Set Number (SEGD) DFM: 133
DFM: 116 · set number (SEGD) DFM: 118
· Set Starting Time (SEGD)
Browser
DFM: 118
· settings FM1: 6
· set, number of channels in
Button FM2: 3 DFM: 118
Bypass · sets per record DFM: 114
· file exports FM2: 225 · type (SEGD) DFM: 143
Bytes per scan (SEGD) DFM: 114 · type id (SEGD) DFM: 147
· Type Identification (SEGD)
C DFM: 119
Channels, number of (SPS)
Cable
· length, Line IM: 299
DFM: 11, DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
· Line cable length IM: 299 DFM: 62
Calendar FM2: 84 Charge
Capacitance · Depth DFM: 24, DFM: 66

365 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

· Length DFM: 24, DFM: 66 DFM: 145

Circular bearing of H256 (SPS) · unit type (SEGD) DFM: 145
DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50, Conversion
DFM: 60 · sample to mV DFM: 146
Cleaning Coord. status final/prov (SPS)
· boxes IM: 290 DFM: 14, DFM: 25, DFM: 54,
· plugs IM: 290 DFM: 66
Click FM2: 3 Coordinate location (SPS) DFM: 9,
Client DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 59
· main window FM2: 13 Copy
· SPS DFM: 9, DFM: 18, · and Paste FM2: 6
DFM: 49, DFM: 58 · function (Export window)
Clock FM2: 223
· time w.r.t. GMT (SPS) DFM: 9, Core FM1: 618
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, Correlator, noise supp (SPS)
DFM: 59 DFM: 13, DFM: 24, DFM: 53,
CMRR DFM: 65
· geophone string FM1: 624 Corrosion IM: 305
Colour code FM2: 106 Crew
Comment · name, Comment (SPS) DFM: 11,
· VP table FM2: 43 DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Comments DFM: 62
· SEGD DFM: 131 Cut off
Common mode · error (SEGD) DFM: 140
· rejection ratio, geophones · high limits (SEGD) DFM: 140
FM1: 624 · low limit (SEGD) DFM: 140
Connection · value (SEGD) DFM: 140
· opening a session FM1: 3 CX-508 Concentrator IM: 9
Continuous
· shooting FM1: 181
Continuous monitoring FM2: 27
D
Control Damp coeff, natural freq. (SPS)
· type (SPS) DFM: 13, DFM: 24, DFM: 12, DFM: 52
DFM: 53, DFM: 65 Damping coeff, natural freq (SPS)
· unit serial number (SEGD) DFM: 23, DFM: 64

366
Index
>

Data · Channels (tests) FM1: 87

· Bypass FM2: 225 · of grid units (SPS) DFM: 9,
· record sorting order (SPS) DFM: 19, DFM: 49,
DFM: 7, DFM: 46 DFM: 60
Data Harvester · of survey area (SPS) DFM: 9,
· connecting FM2: 296 DFM: 17, DFM: 49,
· disconnecting FM2: 297 DFM: 58
· harvesting FM2: 298 Desktop FM1: 7
· software, installing IM: 344 Destination Devices FM2: 220
· uploading data FM2: 300 Diagnostic codes FM2: 133
· user guide FM2: 292 Dialog box FM2: 3
Date Digital
· of survey (SPS) DFM: 9, · Sensor Unit, deploying IM: 295,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, IM: 484
DFM: 58 Discontinuous
· SEGD DFM: 128 · shooting FM1: 181
Day Double-click FM2: 3
· of year (SPS) DFM: 15, DSU
DFM: 27, DFM: 55, · Deploying IM: 295, IM: 484
DFM: 68 DSU1-508 IM: 8
DCM Dump FM2: 61
· Launch FM2: 13 Dump stacking fold (SEGD)
· Patcher FM2: 11
DFM: 127
· Server
Start/Stop FM2: 10
Duplicate
· stakes FM2: 118
Dead seis traces, number of
DFM: 122
Deploying E
· field equipment IM: 288, Ethernet
IM: 481 · port, identifying IM: 30
Depth Event
· charge DFM: 24, DFM: 66 · definition text file FM2: 245
· towing DFM: 25, DFM: 66 Expanded file number (SEGD)
Descale Multiplier (SEGD) DFM: 116, DFM: 117
DFM: 118 Explosive (SPS) DFM: 14,
Description

367 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

DFM: 54 · unit type (SEGD) DFM: 143

Exponent, subscans DFM: 119 FDU-508 IM: 7
Export · functions IM: 7
· Auto/Manual FM2: 216 Fibre Optics
· client window FM2: 204 · TFOI, connecting IM: 298,
· markers FM2: 48 IM: 489
Export window FM2: 204 Field
Extended · computer system(s) (SPS)
· channel set number (SEGD) DFM: 9, DFM: 18,
DFM: 121, DFM: 133 DFM: 49, DFM: 59
· Channel Sets/Scan Types (SEGD) · record increment (SPS) DFM: 16,
DFM: 116 DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
· file number (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 70
· header (SEGD) DFM: 122 · record number (SPS) DFM: 16,
· header blocks (SEGD) DFM: 116 DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
· header flag (SEGD) DFM: 121 DFM: 70
· header length (SEGD) DFM: 114 · tape number (SPS) DFM: 16,
· receiver line number (SEGD) DFM: 29, DFM: 56,
DFM: 135 DFM: 70
· receiver point number (SEGD) File
DFM: 136 · count (SEGD) DFM: 128
· Record Length (SEGD) · Header block (SEGD) DFM: 113
DFM: 116 · number (SEGD) DFM: 113,
Extender DFM: 133
· TFOI, connecting IM: 298, Files
IM: 489 · per tape FM2: 211
External · per tape (SEGD) DFM: 128
· header (SEGD) DFM: 131 Filter
· header blocks (SEGD) DFM: 116 · alias Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS)
· header length (SEGD) DFM: 115 DFM: 11, DFM: 21,
DFM: 51, DFM: 62
· low Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS)
F DFM: 11, DFM: 21,
Factor to metre (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 51, DFM: 62
DFM: 19, DFM: 49, DFM: 60 · notch Hz, -3 dB points (SPS)
FDU DFM: 11, DFM: 51

368
Index
>

· notch Hz, -3dB points (SPS) DFM: 113

DFM: 21, DFM: 62 · Header block 2 (SEGD)
· type FM1: 76 DFM: 116
· type (SEGD) DFM: 128 · Header block 3 (SEGD)
Filtering DFM: 117
· seismic trace display FM1: 431 · Header Block Number (SEGD)
Firmware update FM2: 62 DFM: 116, DFM: 117
First · Trailer blocks, number of
· Notch Frequency (SEGD) DFM: 116
DFM: 121 Geodetic datum
· Timing Word (SEGD) DFM: 133 · parameters (SPS) DFM: 9,
Floppy disk DFM: 19, DFM: 49,
· specifications (SPS) DFM: 7, DFM: 59
DFM: 8, DFM: 46, · spheroid (SPS) DFM: 9,
DFM: 48 DFM: 18, DFM: 49,
Format DFM: 59
· code (SEGD) DFM: 113 Geophone
· SEGD, Rev 2.1 DFM: 151 · arrangement FM1: 625
· SPS, initial DFM: 1 · number per trace FM1: 623
· SPS, Rev. 2.1 DFM: 41 · parallel FM1: 623
· version num. (SPS) DFM: 9, · series FM1: 623
DFM: 17, DFM: 49, · strings FM1: 623
DFM: 58 Geophysical contractor (SPS)
Frequency DFM: 9, DFM: 18, DFM: 49,
· Nyquist FM1: 77, FM2: 238 DFM: 58
From channel (SPS) DFM: 16, Getting started FM2: 7
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70 · 508XT GUI FM1: 1
From receiver (SPS) DFM: 17, GPS
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70 · correcting geometry errors
Geometry
correcting with GPS posi-
G tions FM2: 178
Gain · correcting Stake ID errors
· geophone string FM1: 624 FM2: 116
General GPS position FM2: 26
· Header block 1 (SEGD) Grid

369 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

· coord. at origin (SPS) DFM: 10, I

DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
DFM: 60 Icon FM2: 3
· origin (SPS) DFM: 10, Impedance
DFM: 20, DFM: 60 · geophone string FM1: 624
Group Import
· geophone string FM1: 627 · administration window FM1: 618
Guest · markers from CSV FM2: 48
· privileges FM1: 616 · WTU list from PFT FM2: 286
Index
· box FM2: 3
H Install
Hardware · administration window FM1: 618
· installing IM: 25 Installing
Harvest Multiple Autonomous CX- · Data Harvester software IM: 344
508 FM1: 105 · hardware IM: 25
Harvesting FM2: 298 · PFT software IM: 264
· recommendations FM2: 332 Instrument
Harvesting CX-508 FM1: 643 · Code (I) tables (SPS) DFM: 11,
Header record DFM: 51
· description (SPS) DFM: 17, · Code (SPS) DFM: 16, DFM: 29,
DFM: 58 DFM: 56, DFM: 70
· specification (SPS) DFM: 8, Internal
DFM: 48 · time break (SEGD) DFM: 126
Help
· language FM1: 6 J
Historic
· editing type (SEGD) DFM: 126 Julian day (SEGD) DFM: 113
· range (SEGD) DFM: 126
· taper length (SEGD) DFM: 126 L
· threshold Init value (SEGD)
Language
DFM: 126
· help FM1: 6
· zeroing length (SEGD)
DFM: 126 Lat. Long
· initial line (SPS) DFM: 10,
Hour of day (SEGD) DFM: 113
DFM: 20, DFM: 50,

370
Index
>

DFM: 60 · user FM1: 4

· scale factor (SPS) DFM: 10, Log in
DFM: 20, DFM: 50, · connecting to server FM1: 4
DFM: 60 · name FM1: 5
Lat. of standard parallel(s) (SPS) Long. of central meridian (SPS)
DFM: 9, DFM: 19, DFM: 49, DFM: 10, DFM: 19, DFM: 50,
DFM: 60 DFM: 60
Launcher Low
· bar, customizing FM1: 9 · stacks, number of DFM: 147
· icons FM1: 8, FM2: 31 · Trace Percentage (SEGD)
Leakage DFM: 126
· error (SEGD) DFM: 141 · Trace Value (SEGD) DFM: 126
· limit (SEGD) DFM: 141 Low-cut
· value (SEGD) DFM: 141 · Filter frequency (SEGD)
Length DFM: 120
· record (SEGD) DFM: 127 · Filter slope (SEGD) DFM: 120
Limits
· WTU parameters FM2: 78 M
Line
· name (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 16, Management
DFM: 26, DFM: 29, · sessions FM1: 617
DFM: 55, DFM: 56, Manual
DFM: 67, DFM: 70 · Export FM2: 216
· number format (SPS) DFM: 10, · shooting FM1: 181
DFM: 20, DFM: 50, Manual assignment FM2: 182
DFM: 61 Manufacturer’s
· sequence number, SPS DFM: 49, · code (SEGD) DFM: 114
DFM: 58 · serial nb (SEGD) DFM: 114
Linear Map grid
· Phase FM1: 83, FM2: 238, · easting (SPS) DFM: 15,
FM2: 239 DFM: 27, DFM: 55,
List DFM: 68
· box FM2: 3 · northing (SPS) DFM: 15,
Live seis traces, number of DFM: 27, DFM: 55,
DFM: 122 DFM: 68
Local Markers

371 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

· assigning, PFT list FM2: 287 · seismic data setup FM1: 433
· history FM2: 120 Normalization
· import from CSV FM2: 48 · seismic traces FM1: 433
Max Notch
· of max, Aux (SEGD) DFM: 127 · frequency (SEGD) DFM: 121
· of max, Seis (SEGD) DFM: 127 Number of
MEMS IM: 8 · Auxes (SEGD) DFM: 122
Minimum · blocks of General Trailer (SEGD)
· Phase FM1: 77, FM2: 238, DFM: 116
FM2: 239 · channel sets per record (SEGD)
Minute of day (SEGD) DFM: 113 DFM: 114
Mouse · channels (SPS) DFM: 11,
· Buttons FM2: 3 DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Multi-component DFM: 62
· recording (SPS) DFM: 11, · channels in this channel set
DFM: 22, DFM: 51, (SEGD) DFM: 118
DFM: 63 · dead Seis traces (SEGD)
DFM: 122
· geophones per trace FM1: 623
N · live Seis traces (SEGD)
Name DFM: 122
· Log in FM1: 5 · sample skew 32 byte extensions
NAS4000 (SEGD) DFM: 114
· shock-mount parts IM: 223 · samples in trace (SEGD)
No. sub arrays, nom depth (SPS) DFM: 122
DFM: 25, DFM: 66 · samples per trace DFM: 131
Noise · samples per trace (SEGD)
· elimination type (SEGD) DFM: 134
DFM: 126 · Seis traces (SEGD) DFM: 122
Noisy · stacks low (SEGD) DFM: 147
· stacks noisy (SEGD) DFM: 147
· stacks, number of DFM: 147
· subscans exponent (SEGD)
· trace percentage (SEGD)
DFM: 126 DFM: 119
· traces (SEGD) DFM: 122
Nominal towing depth DFM: 25,
· windows (SEGD) DFM: 126
DFM: 66
Nunits, len, width (SPS) DFM: 12,
None

372
Index
>

DFM: 13, DFM: 23, DFM: 24, IM: 194, IM: 394, FM1: 500
DFM: 52, DFM: 53, DFM: 64, Permission FM1: 616
DFM: 65 PFT
Nyquist FM1: 77, FM2: 238 · software, installing IM: 264
PFT lists
· archive FM2: 288
O · Assigning markers FM2: 287
Observer Phase
· privileges FM1: 616 · angle (SEGD) DFM: 117
Offset · Control (SEGD) DFM: 117
· to coord. location (SPS) DFM: 9, · Linear FM1: 83, FM2: 238,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, FM2: 239
DFM: 59 · Minimum FM1: 77, FM2: 238,
Open FM2: 239
· session FM1: 3, FM2: 8 Pilot length (SEGD) DFM: 127
Operation window FM1: 613 Ping IM: 30
Optical Fibre Plug
· TFOI, connecting IM: 298, · cleaning IM: 290
IM: 489 Point (to) FM2: 4
Organization Point Code
· code DFM: 286 · SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 26,
Outstanding DFM: 55, DFM: 67
· VP FM2: 99 Point Depth (SPS) DFM: 15,
DFM: 26, DFM: 55, DFM: 67
P Point Index
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 16,
Parallel
DFM: 26, DFM: 29,
· geophone FM1: 623
DFM: 55, DFM: 56,
Parameters DFM: 67, DFM: 70
· acquisition FM2: 76
Point number
· loading to WTU FM2: 93
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 16,
Password DFM: 26, DFM: 29,
· expiry date FM1: 616 DFM: 55, DFM: 56,
· opening a session FM1: 5 DFM: 67, DFM: 70
Paste FM2: 6 Point record
Peripherals IM: 133, IM: 182,

373 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

· description (SPS) DFM: 26, Q

DFM: 67
· specification (SPS) DFM: 15, QC
DFM: 55 · age FM2: 99
Polarity · age, max. FM2: 36
· SEGD DFM: 114 · Time FM2: 99
Pos. proc. contractor (SPS) DFM: 9, Quadrant bearing of H256 (SPS)
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 59 DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
POSC DFM: 286 DFM: 61
Positioning Quality Control
· contractor (SPS) DFM: 9, · check records (SPS) DFM: 14,
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 54
DFM: 58 QuietSeis IM: 2
Post-plot date of issue (SPS)
DFM: 9, DFM: 18, DFM: 49, R
DFM: 58 R,S,X file quality control (SPS)
Power DFM: 14, DFM: 54
· requirements IM: 31
Rate
P-P bar/m,prim/bubble (SPS) · refresh FM2: 16
DFM: 25, DFM: 66 · sample FM1: 76
Prestack within field units (SEGD) Raw SEG-D FM2: 36
DFM: 126 Real-time alerts FM2: 26
Printer IM: 196 Reaper window FM2: 308
Privileges FM1: 616 Receiver
Process · code (Rx) tables (SPS) DFM: 12,
· Type, SEGD DFM: 127 DFM: 52
· VPs FM2: 41 · index (SPS) DFM: 17,
Project code and description (SPS) DFM: 30, DFM: 57,
DFM: 10, DFM: 20, DFM: 50, DFM: 71
DFM: 61 · line number (SEGD) DFM: 134
Projection · point easting (SEGD) DFM: 137
· type (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 19, · point elevation (SEGD)
DFM: 49, DFM: 60 DFM: 137
· zone (SPS) DFM: 9, DFM: 19, · point index (SEGD) DFM: 134
DFM: 49, DFM: 60 · point northing (SEGD)

374
Index
>

DFM: 137 · int. Record Len. (SPS) DFM: 11,

· point number (SEGD) DFM: 134 DFM: 51
Record · int., Record Length (SPS)
· identification (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 21, DFM: 62
DFM: 16, DFM: 55, · Rate FM1: 76
DFM: 56 · skew extensions, number of
· length (SEGD) DFM: 127 DFM: 114
· type (SEGD) DFM: 114 · skew, SEGD DFM: 133
Record length · to mV conversion factor
· SEGD DFM: 114 DFM: 146
Refraction Sample Rate
· delay, SEGD DFM: 126 · SEGD DFM: 122
Refresh Samples
· rate FM2: 16 · in trace, number of DFM: 122
Relation record · per trace, number of DFM: 131,
· description (SPS) DFM: 29, DFM: 134
DFM: 70 Scale
· specification (SPS) DFM: 16, · factor (SPS) DFM: 10,
DFM: 56 DFM: 20, DFM: 50,
Remote DFM: 60
· user FM1: 4 Scan Type
Remote Connection FM1: 4 · Header (SEGD) DFM: 118
Resistance · Number (SEGD) DFM: 133
· error (SEGD) DFM: 139 · per record (SEGD) DFM: 114
· high limit (SEGD) DFM: 139 Scheduled
· low limit (SEGD) DFM: 139 · BIT VPs, generate FM2: 50
· value (SEGD) DFM: 139 · tests FM2: 79
Revision Number (SEGD) SCI-508 IM: 19
DFM: 116 Scrollbar FM2: 4
RMS normalization FM1: 433 Second
Role FM1: 616 · Notch Frequency (SEGD)
RSSI FM2: 99 DFM: 121
· of minute (SEGD) DFM: 113
SEGD
S · format, Rev 2.1 DFM: 151
Sample · Trace Blocking FM2: 212

375 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

Seis traces, number of DFM: 122 Setup

Seismic · AGC FM1: 433
· datum (SPS) DFM: 15, · Filtering, seismic trace display
DFM: 26, DFM: 55, FM1: 431
DFM: 67 · Normalization, seismic traces
· instrument header records (SPS) FM1: 433
DFM: 21, DFM: 62 · Time, exponential FM1: 433
· receiver header records (SPS) SH geophone IM: 294
DFM: 23, DFM: 64 Shock-mount
· source header records (SPS) · NAS4000 IM: 223
DFM: 23, DFM: 65 Shooting
Select FM2: 4 · system, connecting IM: 41
Selecting Shot
· table cells FM2: 6 · Depth, charge len. (SPS)
Senior DFM: 14, DFM: 54
· Observer, privileges FM1: 616 · depth, charge len. (SPS)
Sensor DFM: 24, DFM: 66
· sensitivity (SEGD) DFM: 144 · number (SEGD) DFM: 122
Sensor Type Size
· Number (sensor tests) DFM: 137 · vert. stk fold (SPS) DFM: 13,
· SEGD code DFM: 136 DFM: 53
Sequence Size, vert. stk fold (SPS) DFM: 24,
· Line, SPS DFM: 49, DFM: 58 DFM: 65
Series Skew, sample, number of extensions
· geophones FM1: 623 DFM: 114
Server Sleep
· log on to FM1: 4 · time, WTU FM2: 85
· start/stop FM2: 10 · WTU FM2: 49
Session Slip-sweep
· manager FM1: 617 · mode used (SEGD) DFM: 128
· opening FM1: 3, FM2: 8 Software
Sets, channel DFM: 114 · version (SEGD) DFM: 128
Settings SoH FM2: 49
· browser FM1: 6 Soil, drill method (SPS) DFM: 14,
· help FM1: 6 DFM: 25, DFM: 54, DFM: 66

376
Index
>

Source Stake ID mapping

· aux nb (SEGD) DFM: 127 · Aided assignenment FM2: 178
· code (Sx) tables (SPS) DFM: 13, · Auto-assignment FM2: 178
DFM: 53 · Manual assignment FM2: 182
· easting (SEGD) DFM: 128 Starting
· elevation (SEGD) DFM: 128 · DCM server FM2: 10
· Line Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 State of Health FM2: 49, FM2: 158
· northing (SEGD) DFM: 128 Static correction (SPS) DFM: 15,
· Point Index (SEGD) DFM: 117 DFM: 26, DFM: 55, DFM: 67
· Point Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 Stopping
· Set Number (SEGD) DFM: 117 · DCM server FM2: 10
Source Devices FM2: 220 Streamer cable number (SEGD)
Spacing DFM: 121
· IM: 299 String
· FDU IM: 299 · gain, geophone FM1: 624
· FDU-508 · group, geophone FM1: 627
Spacing IM: 299 · impedance, geophone FM1: 624
Spread · wiring, geophones FM1: 627
· number (SEGD) DFM: 123 Subarrays, number of DFM: 25,
· type (SEGD) DFM: 123
DFM: 66
SPS
Subscan exponent DFM: 119
· format, initial DFM: 1,
DFM: 274 Sum VP/WTU FM2: 106
· Rev. 2.1 DFM: 41 Super-spread FM2: 43
· Sercel (over 10000 traces) Surface
DFM: 38 · elevation, SPS DFM: 15,
Stacking Fold DFM: 55
· SEGD DFM: 127 Surface elevation
Stacks, number of · SPS DFM: 27, DFM: 68
· Low DFM: 147 Swath
· Noisy DFM: 147 · first line (SEGD) DFM: 123
Stake ID FM2: 116 · first number (SEGD) DFM: 123
· correcting with GPS position Sweep
FM2: 116 · freq start, end (SPS) DFM: 13,
· loading to Position FM2: 167 DFM: 53
· updating FM2: 118 · frequency start,end (SPS)

377 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

DFM: 24, DFM: 65 · event definition FM2: 245

· length (SEGD) DFM: 127 TFOI
· type, length (SPS) DFM: 13, · connecting IM: 298, IM: 489
DFM: 24, DFM: 53, TFOI-508 IM: 10
DFM: 65 Theft Alarm
· WTU FM2: 27
T Third Notch Frequency (SEGD)
DFM: 121
Table
· how to select FM2: 6
Threshold
· Hold/Var (SEGD) DFM: 126
Tape
· type tables (SEGD) DFM: 127
· drive IM: 23
· Label FM2: 210
Tilt
· error (SEGD) DFM: 139
· label (SEGD) DFM: 127
· limit (SEGD) DFM: 139
· number of files FM2: 211
· value (SEGD) DFM: 139
· number, SEGD DFM: 128
· type, format, density (SPS) Tilt Model
DFM: 11, DFM: 21, · create FM2: 43, FM2: 110
DFM: 51, DFM: 62 · WTU parameters, load FM2: 76
Tape/disk identifier (SPS) DFM: 9, Time
DFM: 18, DFM: 49, DFM: 58 · delay, FTB-SOD (SPS) DFM: 11,
DFM: 21, DFM: 51,
Taper
DFM: 62
· length start, end (SPS) DFM: 13,
· exponential, trace display
DFM: 24, DFM: 53,
FM1: 433
DFM: 65
· SPS DFM: 15, DFM: 27,
TB DFM: 55, DFM: 68
· window, SEGD DFM: 122
Time break
Tb to T0 time (SEGD) DFM: 126 · SEGD DFM: 123
Test · window, SEGD DFM: 133
· Record, type (SEGD) DFM: 123 To channel (SPS) DFM: 16,
· Spread FM1: 87
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 70
Tests
To receiver (SPS) DFM: 17,
· on request FM2: 83
DFM: 29, DFM: 57, DFM: 71
Text
· box FM2: 4
Toggle
· button FM2: 4
Text file

378
Index
>

Topo view · Live seis DFM: 122

· Complete window FM2: 107 · Seismic DFM: 122
· Data Harvester FM2: 314 Trailer, general DFM: 116
Total number of traces (SEGD) Type
DFM: 122 · Model, Polarity (SPS) DFM: 11,
Towing depth DFM: 25, DFM: 66 DFM: 12, DFM: 13,
Trace DFM: 21, DFM: 23,
· blocking FM2: 212 DFM: 24, DFM: 51,
· data block DFM: 131 DFM: 52, DFM: 53,
· edit (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 62, DFM: 64,
· Number (SEGD) DFM: 133 DFM: 65
· number of samples in DFM: 122 · of process (SEGD) DFM: 127
Trace Header · of source (SEGD) DFM: 122
· Extension (SEGD) DFM: 133
· Extension Block 1 (SEGD) U
DFM: 134
· Extension block 2 (SEGD)
Unit
· serial number (SEGD) DFM: 142
DFM: 137
· type (SEGD) DFM: 142
· Extension block 3 (SEGD)
DFM: 139 Units
· Extension block 4 (SEGD) · spacing X, Y (SPS) DFM: 12,
DFM: 140 DFM: 13, DFM: 23,
· Extension block 5 (SEGD) DFM: 24, DFM: 52,
DFM: 141 DFM: 53, DFM: 64,
· Extension block 6 (SEGD) DFM: 65
DFM: 142 Updating
· Extension block 7 (SEGD) · stake ID FM2: 118
DFM: 145 Uphole
· Extensions (SEGD) DFM: 121, · time (SEGD) DFM: 123
DFM: 134 · time (SPS) DFM: 15, DFM: 26,
· SEGD DFM: 133 DFM: 55, DFM: 67
Traces URL
· total number of DFM: 122 · opening a session FM1: 4
Traces, number of
· Aux DFM: 122
· Dead seis DFM: 122

379 February 6, 2020

 Index
> 12

V WTU
· parameters, loading FM2: 93
VE464 · position, load to Position
· connecting IM: 38 FM2: 167
Vertical WTU assignment
· datum description (SPS) DFM: 9, · Automatic checks FM2: 183
DFM: 19, DFM: 49, WTU list
DFM: 60 · import from PFT FM2: 286
· Stack (SEGD) DFM: 121 WTU parameters
Vibrator · group, create FM2: 89
· type (SEGD) DFM: 117 · summary FM2: 73
Vibroseis (SPS) DFM: 13,
DFM: 53
View Y
· Topo, Complete window Year (SEGD) DFM: 113
FM2: 107
· Topo, Data Harvester FM2: 314
VP
· Process FM2: 41

W
Wake up
· time, WTU FM2: 85
Water
· depth (SPS) DFM: 15,
DFM: 26, DFM: 55,
DFM: 67
· gun (SPS) DFM: 14, DFM: 54
Weathering thickness (SPS)
DFM: 14, DFM: 25, DFM: 54,
DFM: 66
Weekly calendar FM2: 84
Window
· TB DFM: 122
Working hours FM2: 84

380